Gestetner c7528 Printer Operating instructions

Add to My manuals
341 Pages

advertisement

Gestetner c7528 Printer Operating instructions | Manualzz

Operating Instructions

Software Guide

Read This First

Manuals for This Printer........................................................................................ 9

Preparing for Printing

Quick Install.......................................................................................................... 10

Confirming the Connection Method................................................................... 12

Network Connection................................................................................................. 12

Local Connection ..................................................................................................... 14

Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port.................................................. 16

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .................................................................. 16

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (TCP/IP)................................................. 17

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (IPP) ...................................................... 18

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me - TCP/IP).................. 20

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me - IPP) ....................... 22

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP)......................... 23

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP) .............................. 25

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - TCP/

IP) .......................................................................................................................... 26

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - IPP)

27

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - TCP/IP) ...................... 29

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)............................ 30

Changing the Port Settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ................................ 31

Using the Standard TCP/IP Port ......................................................................... 33

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................ 33

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) ....................................... 34

G1307502_1.00

GB GB EN USA G130-7502 Copyright © 2005

1

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) ..... 35

Using the LPR Port .............................................................................................. 38

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................ 38

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) ....................................... 39

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) ..... 40

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)..................................... 41

Using as the Windows Network Printer ............................................................. 43

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................ 43

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me) ................................ 44

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) ....................................... 45

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) ..... 46

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)..................................... 48

Using as the NetWare Print Server/Remote Printer.......................................... 50

When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver.............................................................. 51

Form Feed................................................................................................................ 52

Banner Page ............................................................................................................ 52

Printing after Resetting the Printer ........................................................................... 52

Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ............................................................. 53

Windows 98 SE/Me - USB ....................................................................................... 53

Windows 2000 - USB ............................................................................................... 55

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB ............................................................. 56

Troubleshooting USB ............................................................................................... 57

Printing with Parallel Connection....................................................................... 59

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................ 59

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me) ................................ 60

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) ....................................... 61

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) ..... 62

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)..................................... 63

Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)............................... 64

Windows 2000.......................................................................................................... 64

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003........................................................................ 66

Printing with Bluetooth Connection................................................................... 68

Supported Profiles.................................................................................................... 68

Printing with Bluetooth Connection .......................................................................... 68

If a Message Appears during Installation .......................................................... 71

Making Option Settings for the Printer .............................................................. 72

Conditions for Bidirectional Communication ............................................................ 72

If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled .............................................................. 73

Setting Up the Printer Driver

PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties............................................................. 75

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................ 75

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................... 76

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................. 78

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................ 79

RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties .......................................................... 82

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................ 82

2

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................... 83

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................. 85

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................ 87

PostScript 3 - Setting Up for Printing ................................................................ 90

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................ 90

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................... 91

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................. 93

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................ 94

Mac OS - Setting Up for Printing.............................................................................. 96

Other Print Operations

Printing a PDF File Directly................................................................................. 98

Using DeskTopBinder Lite ....................................................................................... 98

Installing DeskTopBinder Lite .................................................................................. 98

PDF Direct Printing .................................................................................................. 99

Printing PDF Password-Protected Documents ...................................................... 100

Using Commands................................................................................................... 102

Unauthorized Copy Control .............................................................................. 103

Using [ Data security for copying ] ............................................................................... 103

Using [ Mask type ] .................................................................................................... 105

Important Notice..................................................................................................... 106

Sample Print ....................................................................................................... 107

Printing the First Set............................................................................................... 107

Printing the Remaining Sets................................................................................... 108

Deleting a Sample Print File................................................................................... 109

Checking the Error Log .......................................................................................... 110

Locked Print ....................................................................................................... 112

Sending Print Job to the Printer ............................................................................. 112

Entering a Password .............................................................................................. 113

Deleting a Locked Print File ................................................................................... 114

Checking the Error Log .......................................................................................... 116

Hold Print............................................................................................................ 117

Hold Print Job to the Printer ................................................................................... 117

Print Using the Control Panel................................................................................. 118

Deleting a Hold Print File ....................................................................................... 119

Checking the Error Log .......................................................................................... 120

Stored Print ........................................................................................................ 122

Stored Print Job to the Printer................................................................................ 123

Print Using the Control Panel................................................................................. 123

Deleting a Stored Print File .................................................................................... 124

Checking the Error Log .......................................................................................... 125

Form Feed........................................................................................................... 127

Canceling a Print Job ........................................................................................ 128

Windows - Canceling a Print Job ........................................................................... 128

Mac OS - Canceling a Print Job............................................................................. 129

Caution During Printing .................................................................................... 131

Staple and Punch Position ..................................................................................... 131

3

Punching ................................................................................................................ 133

Collate .................................................................................................................... 135

Spool Printing......................................................................................................... 135

Cover...................................................................................................................... 137

Slip Sheets ............................................................................................................. 138

Memory Capacity and Paper Size.......................................................................... 138

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

What is PictBridge? ........................................................................................... 141

PictBridge Printing ............................................................................................ 142

What Can Be Done on This Machine................................................................ 143

Index Printing ......................................................................................................... 143

Trimming ................................................................................................................ 144

Date and File Name Printing .................................................................................. 144

Paper Size.............................................................................................................. 145

Image Print Size..................................................................................................... 146

Print Number of Pages........................................................................................... 147

Printing Quality....................................................................................................... 148

Color Matching ....................................................................................................... 148

Form Printing.......................................................................................................... 148

Camera Memo Printing .......................................................................................... 149

Exiting PictBridge .............................................................................................. 150

Troubleshooting................................................................................................. 151

Other Reference Information ............................................................................ 152

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Menu Chart ......................................................................................................... 153

Paper Input Menu............................................................................................... 158

Changing the paper input menu............................................................................. 158

Paper Input menu parameters ............................................................................... 159

List/Test Print Menu........................................................................................... 161

Printing a Configuration Page ................................................................................ 161

Interpreting the configuration page ........................................................................ 161

List/Test menu parameters .................................................................................... 163

Maintenance Menu............................................................................................. 165

Changing the maintenance menu .......................................................................... 165

Maintenance menu parameters ............................................................................. 167

System Menu...................................................................................................... 171

Changing the system menu ................................................................................... 171

System menu parameters ...................................................................................... 171

Host Interface Menu........................................................................................... 179

Changing the Host Interface menu ........................................................................ 179

Host Interface menu parameters............................................................................ 179

PCL Menu ........................................................................................................... 186

Changing the PCL menu........................................................................................ 186

PCL Menu parameters ........................................................................................... 186

4

PS Menu.............................................................................................................. 189

Changing the PS menu .......................................................................................... 189

PS Menu parameters ............................................................................................. 189

PDF Menu ........................................................................................................... 191

Changing the PDF menu........................................................................................ 191

PDF Menu parameters........................................................................................... 191

Language Menu.................................................................................................. 193

Changing the language menu ................................................................................ 193

Language menu parameters .................................................................................. 193

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Using Web Image Monitor................................................................................. 194

Displaying Top Page .............................................................................................. 195

About Menu and Mode........................................................................................... 196

Access in the Administrator Mode.......................................................................... 197

Displaying Web Image Monitor Help...................................................................... 197

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ............................................................. 199

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ............................................................... 200

Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration............................................ 201

Locking the Menus on the Printer's Control Panel ................................................. 201

Changing the Paper Type ...................................................................................... 202

Managing User Information.................................................................................... 203

Configuring the Energy Saver Mode ...................................................................... 206

Setting a Password ................................................................................................ 206

Checking the Printer Status ................................................................................... 207

Changing Names and Comments .......................................................................... 207

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .............................................................. 209

Monitoring Printers ................................................................................................. 209

Checking the Printer Status ................................................................................... 209

When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ............................................ 210

Printer Status Notification by E-Mail................................................................ 211

Auto E-mail Notification.......................................................................................... 212

On-demand E-mail Notification .............................................................................. 213

E-Mail authentication.............................................................................................. 213

On-demand E-mail Notification .............................................................................. 214

Remote Maintenance by telnet ......................................................................... 217

Using telnet ............................................................................................................ 217

access .................................................................................................................... 218 appletalk................................................................................................................. 218

autonet ................................................................................................................... 219 btconfig................................................................................................................... 219

devicename............................................................................................................ 220 dhcp ....................................................................................................................... 220

diprint ..................................................................................................................... 221

dns ......................................................................................................................... 222

domainname .......................................................................................................... 224

help ........................................................................................................................ 225 hostname ............................................................................................................... 225

5

ifconfig.................................................................................................................... 225

info ......................................................................................................................... 227 ipp .......................................................................................................................... 227

netware .................................................................................................................. 228

passwd ................................................................................................................... 229

prnlog ..................................................................................................................... 230 rendezvous............................................................................................................. 230

route ....................................................................................................................... 232

set .......................................................................................................................... 233

show....................................................................................................................... 235 slp........................................................................................................................... 235 smb ........................................................................................................................ 235

snmp ...................................................................................................................... 236

sntp ........................................................................................................................ 239

spoolsw .................................................................................................................. 240

sprint ...................................................................................................................... 241 ssdp........................................................................................................................ 241 status...................................................................................................................... 241 syslog ..................................................................................................................... 241

upnp ....................................................................................................................... 242 web......................................................................................................................... 242

wiconfig .................................................................................................................. 243

wins ........................................................................................................................ 245

SNMP................................................................................................................... 247

Getting Printer Information over the Network................................................. 248

Current Printer Status ............................................................................................ 248

Printer configuration ............................................................................................... 254

Understanding the Displayed Information ...................................................... 256

Print Job Information .............................................................................................. 256

Print Log Information.............................................................................................. 256

Configuring the Network Interface Board ............................................................... 257

Message List ...................................................................................................... 263

System Log Information ......................................................................................... 263

Using a Printer Server

Preparing Printer Server ................................................................................... 269

Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .......................................... 269

Using NetWare ................................................................................................... 271

Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x) ........................................................... 271

Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5) ....................................... 273

Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 or 6/6.5 Environment..................................... 275

Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x) ...................................................... 278

Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5) .................................. 281

Special Operations under Windows

Printing Files Directly from Windows .............................................................. 285

Setup...................................................................................................................... 285

6

Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address........................................................ 285

Printing Commands................................................................................................ 287

Mac OS Configuration

Mac OS................................................................................................................ 290

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File .......................................... 290

Setting Up PPD Files ............................................................................................. 291

Creating a Desktop Printer Icon ............................................................................. 291

Setting Up Options ................................................................................................. 292

Installing the ColorSync Profiles ............................................................................ 292

Installing Adobe Type Manager ............................................................................. 293

Installing Screen fonts............................................................................................ 294

Changing to EtherTalk ........................................................................................... 294

Mac OS X ............................................................................................................ 296

Installing the PPD Files .......................................................................................... 296

Setting Up the PPD File ......................................................................................... 296

Setting Up Options ................................................................................................. 297

Using USB Interface............................................................................................... 297

Using Rendezvous ................................................................................................. 297

Changing to EtherTalk ........................................................................................... 298

Configuring the Printer...................................................................................... 299

Using PostScript 3 ............................................................................................. 300

Job Type ................................................................................................................ 300

Duplex Printing....................................................................................................... 302

Color Mode............................................................................................................. 303

Gradation ............................................................................................................... 303

Color Profile ........................................................................................................... 303

Color Setting .......................................................................................................... 304

CMYK Simulation Profile........................................................................................ 305

Dithering................................................................................................................. 305

Gray Reproduction ................................................................................................. 305

Color Matching ....................................................................................................... 305

Printer Utility for Mac......................................................................................... 306

Installing Printer Utility for Mac............................................................................... 306

Starting Printer Utility for Mac ................................................................................ 307

Printer Utility for Mac Functions ............................................................................. 307

Appendix

Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM ............................................. 314

Printer Drivers for This Printer................................................................................ 314

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin .............................................................................. 315

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ............................................................................... 316

Cautions to Take When Using in a network .................................................... 319

Connecting a Dial-up Router to a Network............................................................. 319

Using DHCP........................................................................................................... 319

Configuring the WINS Server................................................................................. 321

Using the Dynamic DNS Function.......................................................................... 323

7

Configuring SSL Encryption............................................................................. 325

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption................................................................ 325

User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) ...................................................... 329

Installing the Certificate Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client............................... 330

Installing Font Manager 2000............................................................................ 332

Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0 ............................................ 333

When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame...................................... 334

Operating Environment .......................................................................................... 334

Supported Printer Drivers....................................................................................... 334

Limitations .............................................................................................................. 334

Cautions When Using Bluetooth Interface Unit .............................................. 337

Information about Installed Applications ........................................................ 338 expat ...................................................................................................................... 338

JPEG LIBRARY ..................................................................................................... 338

NetBSD .................................................................................................................. 338

Samba(Ver 2.2.2-1.1)............................................................................................. 340

RSA BSAFE

®

......................................................................................................... 341

8

Read This First

Manuals for This Printer

For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual.

Setup Guide

Provides information about printer setup and options.

Maintenance Guide

Provides information about paper, replacing supplies, and dealing with paper jams and error messages.

Software Guide (HTML) (this manual)

Provides basic information about installing the printer driver and software, using the printer in a network environment, and configuration and setup.

Also, provides information about configuring and monitoring printer status using software and a Web browser.

Some functions cannot be used depending on your printer.

G1307502_1.00

Copyright © 2005

9

Preparing for Printing

Quick Install

Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0 users can easily install this software using the CD-ROM provided.

Using Quick Install, the PCL printer driver and/or RPCS printer driver and Smart-

DeviceMonitor for Client is installed under network environment, and TCP/IP port will be set.

To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage

Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.

The Quick Install is not available when using this printer under USB connec-

tion. If you connect using USB, see p.53 “Installing the Printer Driver Using

USB”

.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “ Setup.exe ” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ Quick Install ].

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

E

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ], and then click

[ Next ].

F

Select the printer model you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] dialog box.

For network connection via TCP/IP, select the printer whose IP address is displayed in [ Connect To ] .

For parallel connection, select the printer whose printer port is displayed in

[ Connect To ] .

G

Click [ Install ].

The printer driver installation starts.

H

Click [ Finish ].

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

G1307502_1.00

Copyright © 2005

10

Preparing for Printing

I

Click [ Exit ] in the first dialog box of the installer, and then take out the

CD-ROM.

To stop installation of the selected software, click [ Cancel ] before installation is complete.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

Select a printer to whose IP address is displayed in [ Connect To ] to install

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client when using TCP/IP.

Quick Install is not available unless bidirectional communication between the printer and computer is enabled via parallel connection. See

p.73 “If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled” for details about bidirectional com-

munication between printer and computer.

11

Preparing for Printing

Confirming the Connection Method

This printer supports network and local connection.

Before installing the printer driver, check how the printer is connected. Follow the driver installation procedure that is appropriate to the connection method.

Network Connection

This printer can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.

Using this printer as the Windows printing port

Network connections can be established through Ethernet, IEEE 802.11b, and

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).

Available ports are determined based on the combination of Windows operating system version and connection method used.

Windows 95/98

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Windows Me

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

None

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

12

Preparing for Printing

Windows 2000

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

Standard TCP/IP

LPR port

None IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Windows XP

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

Standard TCP/IP

LPR port

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

Standard TCP/IP

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Windows Server 2003

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

Standard TCP/IP

LPR port

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

Standard TCP/IP

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Windows NT 4.0

Connection Method

Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)

Available Ports

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port

LPR port

None

See the explanation of how to install the printer driver for each type of port.

For the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port, see p.16 “Using the SmartDevice-

Monitor for Client Port”

.

For the Standard TCP/IP port, see p.33 “Using the Standard TCP/IP Port” .

For the LPR port, see

p.38 “Using the LPR Port”

.

13

Preparing for Printing

Using as a network printer

This printer can be used as the Windows network printer, the NetWare print server, or the NetWare remote printer.

See the explanation of how to install the printer driver for each type of network printer.

For the Windows network printer, see

p.43 “Using as the Windows Network

Printer” .

For the NetWare print server and remote printer, see

p.50 “Using as the Net-

Ware Print Server/Remote Printer”

.

Local Connection

Local connections can be established via parallel, USB, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections.

Windows operating system version determines the available connection methods.

• Windows 95:

• Parallel connections

• Windows 98:

• Parallel connections

• Windows 98 SE/Me:

• USB, Parallel, and Bluetooth connections

• Windows 2000:

• USB, Parallel, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections

• Windows XP:

• USB, Parallel, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections

• Windows Server 2003:

14

Preparing for Printing

• USB, Parallel, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections

• Windows NT 4.0:

• Parallel connections

See the explanation of how to install the printer driver for each method of connection.

For the USB connection, see p.53 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB”

.

For the parallel connection, see

p.59 “Printing with Parallel Connection” .

For the IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) connection, see

p.64 “Installing the Printer

Driver Using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)”

.

For the Bluetooth connection, see

p.68 “Printing with Bluetooth Connection”

.

15

Preparing for Printing

Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Port

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

To install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.

Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client before installing the printer driver when using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin ].

E

The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client installer starts.

F

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ], and then click [ Next > ].

The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client installer starts.

G

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box. After reading through its contents, click [ Yes ] to accept it.

H

Follow the instructions on the display to install SmartDeviceMonitor for

Client.

I

Click [ OK ].

If you are required to restart the computer after installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, restart the computer.

To stop installation of the selected software, click [ Cancel ] before installation is complete.

16

Preparing for Printing

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client supports the following languages: Czech,

Danish, German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Hungarian, Dutch, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Finnish, Swedish, Chinese Simple and Chinese Traditional.

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (TCP/IP)

To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows

Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select the printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

G

Select the printer model you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

J

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ New Port...

].

K

Click [ TCP/IP ], and then click [ Search ].

17

Preparing for Printing

A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.

L

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify address ] , and then enter the IP address or host name of the printer.

Under Windows 95/98/Me, you cannot add an IP address partially similar to the one already used. For example, if “192.168.0.2” is in use, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, if “192.168.0.20” is in use, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.

M

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

N

Set a user code, if necessary.

This allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check statistics about the number of sheets which each user prints. For details, see

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic characters or symbols are available.

O

Select the [ Default Printer ] check box to configure the printer as default.

P

Click [ Finish ].

Installation starts.

Q

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, install using [ Add Printer ] . See

p.71

“If a Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (IPP)

To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage

Printers permission. For this, log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

18

Preparing for Printing

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select a printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

G

Select the printer model you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

J

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ New Port...

].

K

Click [ IPP ].

L

In the [ Printer URL ] box, enter “http://printer's address/printer” as the printer's address.

If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL( a protocol for encrypted communication), enter “https://printer's address/printer” (Internet Explorer

5.01, or a higher version must be installed). Create the IPP port in SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

(example IP address: 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer

You can enter “http://printer's address/ipp” as the printer's address.

M

Enter a name for identifying the printer in [ IPP Port Name ]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.

If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [ Printer URL ] box becomes the IPP port name.

N

Click [ Detailed Settings ] to make necessary settings.

19

Preparing for Printing

For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

O

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

P

Set a user code, if necessary.

This allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check the number of sheets each user prints. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for

Admin Help.

Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic characters or symbols can be entered.

Q

Select the [ Default Printer ] check box to configure the printer as default.

R

Click [ Finish ].

Installation starts.

S

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

To stop installation of the selected software, click [ Cancel ] before installation is complete.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [ Add Printer ] . See

p.71 “If a

Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me -

TCP/IP)

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

20

Preparing for Printing

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

G

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

H

In the [ Available ports: ] box, click [ Printer Port ], and then click [ Next ].

I

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

J

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

K

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

L

Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click

[ Properties ].

M

On the [ Details ] tab, click [ Add Port… ].

N

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ] in the [ Other ] list, and then click [OK].

O

Click [ TCP/IP ], and then click [ Search ].

A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.

P

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify address ] , and then enter the IP address or host name of the printer.

You cannot add an IP address partially similar to the one already used. For example, if “192.168.0.2” is in use, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, if “192.168.0.20” is in use, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.

Q

Click [ OK ].

R

Check that the selected port is highlighted in [ Printer to the following port ], and then click [ OK ].

21

Preparing for Printing

S

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me - IPP)

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

G

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

H

In the [ Available ports: ] box, click [ Printer Port ], and then click [ Next ].

I

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

J

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

K

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

L

Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click

[ Properties ].

22

Preparing for Printing

M

On the [ Details ] tab, click [ Add Port… ].

N

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ] in the [ Other ] list, and then click [ OK ].

O

Click [ IPP ].

P

In the [ Printer URL ] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the printer's address.

If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer

5.01, or a higher version must be installed).

(example IP address: 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer

You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.

Q

Enter a name for identifying the printer in [ IPP Port Name ]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.

If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [ Printer URL ] box becomes the IPP port name.

R

Click [ Detailed Settings ] to configure proxy server, IPP user name, and other settings. Make these settings, and then click [ OK ]. For details, see

Help on the CD-ROM.

For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Help.

S

Click [ OK ].

T

Check that the selected port is highlighted in [ Printer to the following port ], and then click [ OK ] .

U

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

23

Preparing for Printing

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next > ].

G

Click [ Add Port...

].

H

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ Next > ].

I

Click [ TCP/IP ], and then click [ Search ].

A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.

J

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify address ] , and then enter the IP address or host name of the printer.

K

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

L

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

M

Click [ Next > ].

N

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next > ].

O

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

24

Preparing for Printing

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next > ].

G

Click [ Add Port...

].

H

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ Next > ].

I

Click [ IPP ].

J

In the [ Printer URL ] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the printer's address.

If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer

5.01, or a higher version must be installed).

(example IP address: 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer

You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.

K

Enter a name for identifying the printer in [ IPP Port Name ]. Use a name different from the name of any existing port.

25

Preparing for Printing

If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [ Printer URL ] box becomes the IPP port name.

L

Click [ Detailed Settings ] to configure proxy server, the IPP user name and other settings. Specify the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

M

Click [ OK ].

N

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

O

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

P

Click [ Next > ].

Q

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next > ].

R

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003 - TCP/IP)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe”on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

26

Preparing for Printing

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next > ].

G

Click [ Create a new port: ].

H

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ Next > ].

I

Click [ TCP/IP ], and then click [ Search ].

A list of printers using [ TCP/IP ] appears.

J

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify address ] , and then enter the IP address or host name of the printer.

K

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

L

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

M

Click [ Next > ].

N

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next > ].

O

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003 - IPP)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

27

Preparing for Printing

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next > ].

G

Click [ Create a new port: ].

H

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ Next > ].

I

Click [ IPP ].

J

In the [ Printer URL ] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the printer's address.

If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer

5.01, or a higher version must be installed).

(example IP address: 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer

You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.

K

Enter a name for identifying the printer in [ IPP Port Name ]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.

If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [ Printer URL ] box becomes the IPP port name.

L

Click [ Detailed Settings ] to make necessary settings.

For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

M

Click [ OK ].

N

Check that the name of the printer driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

O

Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

P

Click [ Next > ].

28

Preparing for Printing

Q

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next > ].

R

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 -

TCP/IP)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Add Port: ].

G

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ New Port...

].

H

Click [ TCP/IP ], and then click [ Search ].

A list of printers using [ TCP/IP ] appears.

I

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

29

Preparing for Printing

Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use a printer not listed here, click [ Specify address ] , and then enter the IP address or host name of the printer.

J

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

K

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

L

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

M

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Add Port: ].

G

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor ], and then click [ New Port...

].

30

Preparing for Printing

H

Click [ IPP ].

I

In the [ Printer URL ] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer”as the printer's address.

If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer

5.01, or a higher version must be installed).

(example IP address: 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer

You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.

J

Enter a name for identifying the printer in [ IPP Port Name ]. Use a name different from the one of any existing port.

If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [ Printer URL ] box becomes the IPP port name.

K

Click [ Detailed Settings ] to make necessary settings.

For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

L

Click [ OK ].

M

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

N

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

O

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

P

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Changing the Port Settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Follow the procedure below to change the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as TCP/IP timeout, recovery/parallel printing, and printer groups.

Windows 95/98:

A

Open [ Printers ] window from [ Start ] menu.

31

Preparing for Printing

B

In the [ Printers ] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

C

Click the [ Details ] tab, and then click [ Configure Port ].

The [ Port Settings ] dialog box appears.

Windows 2000 / Windows NT 4.0:

A

Open [ Printers ] window from [ Start ] menu.

B

In the [ Printers ] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

C

On the [ Ports ] tab, click [ Configure Port ].

The [ Port Settings ] dialog box appears.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

B

In the [ Printers ] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

C

Click the [ Details ] tab, and then click [ Configure Port ].

The [ Port Settings ] dialog box appears.

• For TCP/IP, timeout setting can be configured.

If no settings on the [ Recovery/Parallel Printing ] tab are available, follow the procedure below.

A Click [ Cancel ] to close the [ Port Configuration: ] dialog box.

B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the Smart-

DeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar.

C Click [ Extended Features Settings ] , and then select the [ Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port ] check box.

D Click [ OK ] to close the [ Extended Features Settings ] dialog box.

• User, proxy, and timeout settings can be configured for IPP.

For information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Help.

32

Preparing for Printing

Using the Standard TCP/IP Port

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver

To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, and Windows

Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission.

Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select a printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

G

Select the printer model you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

J

Click [ Standard TCP/IP ], and then click [ New Port...

].

Configure the Standard TCP/IP port settings, and then see Windows Help if

[ Standard TCP/IP Port ] does not appear.

K

Click [ Next ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

L

Enter the printer name or IP address in the [ Printer Name or IP Address ] box.

33

Preparing for Printing

The [ Port Name ] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name if necessary.

When screen for Device selection appears, select “RICOH NetworkPrinter

Driver C Model”.

M

Click [ Finish ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

The installation start dialog box reappears.

N

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

O

Configure the default printer as necessary.

P

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

Q

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

To stop installation of the selected software, click [ Cancel ] before installation is complete.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [ Add Printer ] . See

p.71 “If a

Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

34

Preparing for Printing

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next > ].

G

Click [ Add Port...

].

H

Click [ Standard TCP/IP ], and then click [ New Port...

].

I

Click [ Next ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

J

Enter the printer name or IP address in the [ Printer Name or IP Address ] box, and then click [ Next> ].

When screen for Device selection appears, select “RICOH NetworkPrinter

Driver C Model”.

K

Click [ Finish ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

L

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

M

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

N

Click [ Next > ].

O

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next > ].

P

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

35

Preparing for Printing

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next > ].

G

Click [ Create a new port: ].

H

Click [ Standard TCP/IP ] in [ Create a new Port ], and then click [ Next ].

I

Click [ Standard TCP/IP ], and then click [ OK ].

J

Click [ Next ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

K

Enter the printer name or IP address in the [ Printer Name or IP Address ] box, and then click [ Next > ].

When screen for Device selection appears, select “RICOH NetworkPrinter

Driver C Model”.

L

Click [ Finish ] in the [ Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard ] dialog box.

M

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

N

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

O

Click [ Next > ].

P

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next > ].

Q

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

36

Preparing for Printing

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

37

Preparing for Printing

Using the LPR Port

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver

To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows

Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select a printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

G

Select the printer model you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

J

Click [ LPR Port ], and then click [ New Port...

].

If [ LPR Port ] does not appear, see Windows Help and install it.

K

Enter the printer's IP address in the [ Name or address of server providing lpd ] box.

38

Preparing for Printing

L

Enter “lp” in the [ Name of printer or print queue on that server ] box, and then click [ OK ].

The port is added.

M

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

N

Configure the default printer as necessary.

O

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts

P

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [ Add Printer ] . See

p.71 “If a

Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

39

Preparing for Printing

F

Click [ Local printer ], and then click [ Next > ].

G

Click [ Add Port...

].

H

Click [ LPR Port ], and then click [ New Port...

].

I

Enter the printer's IP address in the [ Name or address of server providing lpd ] box.

J

Enter “lp” in the [ Name of printer or print queue on that server ] box, and then click [ OK ].

K

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

L

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

M

Click [ Next > ].

N

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next > ].

O

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

40

Preparing for Printing

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next > ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next > ].

G

Click [ Create a new port: ].

H

Click [ LPR Port ] in [ Create a new Port ], and then click [ Next > ].

I

Enter the printer's IP address in the [ Name or address of server providing lpd ] box.

J

Enter “lp” in the [ Name of printer or print queue on that server box ], and then click [ OK ].

K

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

L

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

M

Click [ Next > ].

N

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Next > ].

O

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

41

Preparing for Printing

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Add Port: ].

G

Select [ LPR Port ], and then click [ OK ].

H

Enter the printer's IP address in the [ Name or address of server providing lpd box ] box.

I

Enter “lp” in the [ Name of printer or print queue on that server ] box, and then click [ OK ].

J

Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [ Next > ].

K

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

L

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

M

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

42

Preparing for Printing

Using as the Windows Network Printer

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver

To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting “Network printer server”, and then select the Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 shared printer.

This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 print server. Do not begin the following procedure before the client is set up and configured correctly.

To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage

Printers permission. For this, log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

If you print with a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDevice-

Monitor port, Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing cannot be used from the client.

If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, notification functions of SmartDeviceMonitor may not be used with the client.

If you print with a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver before you connect the print server to the printer.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select a printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

43

Preparing for Printing

G

Select the [ Printer Name: ] check box to select the printer models you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

J

Click [ Network Printer ], and then click [ OK ].

K

Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the

[ Browse for Printer ] window.

L

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

M

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

N

Configure the user code as necessary.

For an RPCS printer driver, a user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

O

Select the [ Default Printer ] check box to configure the printer as default.

P

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

Q

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer to complete installation.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [ Add Printer ] . See

p.71 “If a

Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDevice-

Monitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

44

Preparing for Printing

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Network Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

G

Click [ Browse ].

H

Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the

[ Browse for Printer ] window.

I

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ].

J

Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [ Next ].

K

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

L

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

M

Restart the computer.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)

Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDevice-

Monitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

45

Preparing for Printing

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Network printer ], and then click [ Next ].

G

Click [ Next ].

H

Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the

[ Shared printers ] window.

I

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ Next ].

J

The printer driver installation starts.

K

Click [ Next> ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

L

Click [ Finish ].

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

46

Preparing for Printing

If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDevice-

Monitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.

If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, Smart-

DeviceMonitor notification functions may not be possible for the client.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Network printer ] and then click [ Next ].

G

Click [ Next ].

H

Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the

[ Shared printers ] window.

I

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ Next ].

J

The printer driver installation starts.

K

Click [ Next > ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

L

Click [ Finish ].

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

47

Preparing for Printing

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDevice-

Monitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.

To print from a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver before you connect the print server to the printer.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Network printer ], and then click [ Next ].

G

Click [ Next ].

H

Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the

[ Shared printers ] window.

I

Select the printer you want to use, and then click [ Next ].

J

Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [ Next ].

K

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

L

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

Restart the computer to complete installation.

48

Preparing for Printing

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

49

Preparing for Printing

Using as the NetWare Print Server/Remote

Printer

This explains how to set up the Windows computer used as the NetWare client.

To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows

Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

The following explanation assumes NetWare Client is installed on the client computer and the NetWare server environment is correctly set up. Install all necessary client applications before following this procedure.

Set up the printer driver while logging on to the NetWare file server.

The following values are used in the example:

• Operating system: Windows 98

• NetWare version: 4.1

• File server name: CAREE

• Queue name: R-QUEUE

A

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

B

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

C

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

D

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

E

Select the printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

F

Select the [ Printer Name ] check box to select the printer models you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

G

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

50

Preparing for Printing

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

H

Click [ Port: ], and then click [ Add ].

I

Click [ Network Printer ], and then click [ OK ].

J

Double-click the name of the NetWare file server on the network tree.

The created queue is displayed.

K

Select the print queue, and then click [ OK ].

L

Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [ Port: ].

M

Click [ Finish ].

The printer driver installation starts.

N

Click [ Finish ] in the [ Component selection ] dialog box.

O

Click [ Finish ] in the [ Introduction complete ] dialog box.

P

In the [ Printers ] window, open the printer properties.

Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, open the printer properties from the [ Printers and Faxes ] window.

Q

On the [ Printer Settings ] tab, clear the [ Form Feed ] and [ Enable Banner ] check boxes.

Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, click the [ NetWare setting ] tab.

Do not select these check boxes since they are automatically selected by the printer driver. If you select the check boxes, the printer may not print correctly.

R

Click [ OK ] to close the printer properties dialog box.

The protocol is set to inactive as default. Enable it using Web Image Monitor or Telnet

When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Follow the procedure below to set up the PostScript 3 printer driver.

A

In the [ Printers ] or [ Printers and Faxes ] window, open the printer properties.

B

Click the [ PostScript ] tab.

When using Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT 4.0, click the [ Device Settings ] tab, and then proceed to step to clear the check box.

51

Preparing for Printing

C

Click [ Advanced ].

D

Clear the [ Send CTRL+D before job ] and [ Send CTRL+D after job ] check boxes, and then click [ OK ].

E

Click [ OK ] to close the printer properties dialog box.

Form Feed

Do not use NetWare to configure form feed. Form feed is controlled by the printer driver on Windows. If NetWare form feed is configured, the printer may not print properly.

Follow the procedure below to disable form feed according to the operating system used:

• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [ Form feed ] check box on the [ Printer Settings ] tab in the printer properties dialog box.

• Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear the [ Form feed ] check box on the [ NetWare Settings ] tab in the printer properties dialog box.

Banner Page

Do not use NetWare to configure a banner page.

Follow the procedure below to disable banner pages according to the operating system used:

• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [ Enable banner ] check box on the [ Printer

Settings ] tab in the printer properties dialog box.

• Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear the [ Enable banner ] check box on the [ NetWare Settings ] tab in the printer properties dialog box.

Printing after Resetting the Printer

Printer to print server connection requires 30 - 40 seconds to resume after the printer is reset. During this period, jobs may be accepted (depending on Net-

Ware specifications) but not printed.

To print after resetting the printer as the remote printer, check on the print server that the remote printer is disconnected, or wait for two minutes before trying to print.

52

Preparing for Printing

Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

This section explains how to install printer drivers using USB.

Make sure that printer is connected to the computer's USB ports using the

USB interface cable.

Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are in progress.

The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.

Windows 98 SE/Me - USB

Installation via USB is not possible under Windows 95/98. Upgrade to Windows 98 SE/Me.

If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the icon of the printer connected to the “USB” port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

A

Check that the power of the printer is off.

B

Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable.

C

Turn on the power of the printer.

The plug and play function starts and the [ New Hardware Found ] , [ Device Driver

Wizard ] , or [ Add New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box appears, depending on the operating system.

D

Click [ Next > ].

E

Click [ Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.

], and then click

[ Next > ].

F

Select the [ Specify a location: ] check box, and then click [ Browse...

].

The [ Browse for Folder ] dialog box appears.

G

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

When Auto Run starts, click [ Exit ] .

To disable Auto Run, press the { Shift } key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the

CD-ROM.

H

Specify the location where USB Printing Support is located, and then click [ Next > ].

53

Preparing for Printing

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of USB Printing Support are stored in the following location:

D:\DRIVES\RPCS\WIN98_ME

I

Check the location, and then click [ Next ].

USB Printing Support is installed.

J

Click [ Finish ].

If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

K

Click [ Next > ].

L

Click [ Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.

], and then click

[ Next > ].

M

Select the [ Specify a location: ], check box, and then click [ Browse...

].

The [ Browse for Folder ] dialog box appears.

N

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

When Auto Run starts, click [ Exit ] .

To disable Auto Run, press the { Shift } key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the

CD-ROM.

O

Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored, and then click [ Next > ].

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:

• RPCS

D:\DRIVES\RPCS\WIN98_ME\(Language)\DISK1

• PCL 5c

D:\DRIVES\PCL5C\WIN98_ME\(Language)\DISK1

• PCL 6

D:\DRIVES\PCL6\WIN98_ME\(Language)\DISK1

• PostScript 3

D:\DRIVES\PS3\WIN98_ME\(Language)\DISK1

P

Check the location, and then click [ Next ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

Q

Click [ Finish ].

54

Preparing for Printing

Installation is complete. If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.

It is not necessary to reinstall USB Printing Support when connecting a different printer via USB interface when USB Printing Support is installed.

After installing USB Printing Support, if the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer.

Install the printer driver from the CD-ROM provided with the printer.

Windows 2000 - USB

Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the icon of the printer connected to the “USB” port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.

A

Check that the power of the printer is off.

B

Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable.

C

Turn on the power of the machine.

Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.

D

Click [ Next ] in the [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box.

E

Select the [ Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended) ] check box, and then click [ Next ].

F

Select the [ Specify location ] check box, and then click [ Next ].

G

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

When Auto Run starts, click [ Exit ] .

To disable Auto Run, press the left { Shift } key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.

H

Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.

55

Preparing for Printing

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:

• RPCS

D:\DRIVES\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

• PCL 5c

D:\DRIVES\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

• PCL 6

D:\DRIVES\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

• PostScript 3

D:\DRIVES\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

I

Check the printer driver location, and then click [ OK ].

J

Click [ Next ].

K

Click [ Finish ].

If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB

Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the icon of the printer connected to the “USB” port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.

If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.

A

Check that the power of the printer is off.

B

Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable.

C

Turn on the power of the machine.

Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.

D

In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [ Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended] ], and then click [ Next > ].

56

Preparing for Printing

E

To disable Auto Run, press the left { Shift } key when inserting the CD-

ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.

If Auto Run starts, click [ Cancel ] , and then [ Exit ] .

F

Select the [ Include this location in the search ] check box under [ Search for the best driver in these location ], and then click [ Browse ] to select the printer driver location.

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:

• RPCS

D:\DRIVES\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

• PCL 5c

D:\DRIVES\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

• PCL 6

D:\DRIVES\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

• PostScript 3

D:\DRIVES\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

G

Check the printer driver location, and then click [ Next ].

H

Click [ Continue ].

I

Click [ Finish ].

If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [ Printers ] window.

The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.

Troubleshooting USB

Problem

The printer is not recognized automatically.

Solutions

Turn off the power of the printer, reconnect the USB cable, and then turn it on again.

57

Preparing for Printing

Windows has already configured the USB settings.

Open Windows' Device Manager, and then, under [ Universal Serial Bus controllers ] , remove any conflicting devices.

Conflicting devices have a yellow [ !

] or [ ?

] icon by them.

Take care not to accidentally remove required devices.

For details, see Windows Help.

❒ When using Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server

2003, an erroneous device is displayed under [ USB

Controller ] in the [ Device Manager ] dialog box.

58

Preparing for Printing

Printing with Parallel Connection

To use a printer connected using a parallel interface, click [ LPT1 ] when installing the printer driver.

Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver

To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows

Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading the agreement, click [ I accept the agreement ] , and then click [ Next ] .

F

Select a printer driver you want to use in the [ Printer Program ] dialog box.

You can select several printer drivers.

G

Select the [ Printer Name ] check box to select the printer models you want to use.

The printer name can be changed in the [ Change settings for 'Printer Name' ] box.

H

Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.

The details shown in [ Comment: ] , [ Driver: ] , and [ Port: ] vary depending on the operating system, printer model, and port.

I

Check that [ LPT1: ] is shown in [ Port: ].

J

Select the [ Default Printer ] check box to configure the printer as default.

K

Click [ Finish ].

59

Preparing for Printing

The printer driver installation starts.

L

Click [ Finish ] in the installation completion dialog box.

To stop installation of the selected software, click [ Cancel ] before installation is complete.

A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If you still want to install the printer driver, use [ Add Printer ] . See

p.71 “If a

Message Appears during Installation” .

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me)

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

G

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

H

In the [ Available ports: ] box, click [ Printer Port ], and then click [ Next ].

I

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

Select the [ Yes ] check box to configure the printer as default.

J

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

60

Preparing for Printing

K

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

G

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

H

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

I

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

61

Preparing for Printing

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows

Server 2003)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Click [ Local Printer ], and then click [ Next ].

G

Select the port you want to use, and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

H

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

I

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

J

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

K

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

62

Preparing for Printing

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,

Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.

D

Click [ PostScript 3 Printer Driver ].

Add Printer Wizard starts.

E

Click [ Next ].

F

Select the port you want to use, and then click [ Next ].

A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.

G

Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [ Next ].

H

Change the printer name if you want, and then click [ Next ].

I

Click [ Next ].

J

Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [ Finish ].

K

Restart the computer to complete installation.

A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.

63

Preparing for Printing

Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394

(SCSI print)

The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.

Quit all applications currently running, and do not print during installation.

Do not connect IEEE 1394 or USB devices to the computer or turn on another printers during installation.

Before uninstalling the printer driver, check that the IEEE 1394 interface cable is disconnected from the computer.

SCSI print must be set to “active” from the control panel. For details, see

p.179 “Host Interface Menu” .

This printer can receive print data from one computer at a time only. An message may appear if jobs from different computers collide.

If jobs collide, the first received is printed first.

When the printer driver is properly installed, connecting or disconnecting the optional IEEE 1394 cable causes the printer icon to change.

Windows 2000

If [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] appears every time the computer is started or the cable is connected, disable the device. To install another printer driver after setting the “1394_00n” port, click [1394_00] as a port during the printer driver installation.

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

The optional 1394 interface unit can be used only with Service Pack 1 (SP1) or higher.

A

Connect the printer and computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.

B

Click [ Next ] in the [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box.

C

When the message “This wizard will complete the installation for this

Device: Unknown” appears, click [ Specify a location ], and then click [ Next

> ].

D

When the message “Locate Driver Files” appears, select the [ Optional search locations ] check box, and then click [ Specify a location ], and then click

[ Next > ].

64

Preparing for Printing

E

To disable Auto Run, press the left { Shift } key when inserting the CD-

ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.

If Auto Run starts, click [ Cancel ] , and then [ Exit ] .

F

Click [ Browse ].

G

Select the printer driver you want to use.

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:

• RPCS

D:\DRIVES\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

• PCL 5c

D:\DRIVES\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

• PCL 6

D:\DRIVES\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

• PostScript 3

D:\DRIVES\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

H

Click [ Open ].

I

Click [ OK ].

J

Follow the instructions.

When installation is complete, the printer connected to “1394_00n” appears in the [ Printers ] window. (“n” shows the number of printers connected.)

If the printer driver has already been installed, the printer icon is added to the [ Printers ] window. In this case, printer driver installation is not necessary.

If printing does not work properly after the installation, delete the port and reinstall the printer driver. For details, see “Printer Does Not Print”, Maintenance Guide.

If you do not want to install the printer when Found New Hardware Wizard starts under an operating system that supports SCSI print, disable the device by following the procedure below.

A When the [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box appears, click [ Next > ] .

B When the message “This wizard will complete the installation for this

Device: Unknown” appears, select the [ Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended] ] check box, and then click [ Next > ] .

C When the message “Please choose your search and installation option.” appears, clear all check boxes from [ Search for the best driver in these locations.

] , and then click [ Next > ] .

65

Preparing for Printing

D When the message “Driver Files Search Results” appears, select the

[ Disable the device. The Add/Remove Hardware Wizard in the control Panel can be able to complete the driver installations.

] check box, and then click [ Finish ] .

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003

SCSI print must be set to “active” from the control panel. For details, see

p.179 “Host Interface Menu” .

Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an account that has Administrators permission.

This printer can receive print data from one computer at a time only. If a job from a computer collides with other data, a message may appear on the computer.

To install another printer driver after setting the “1394_00n” port, click

[ 1394_00 ] as a port during the printer driver installation.

When the printer driver is properly installed, connecting or disconnecting the optional IEEE 1394 cable causes the printer icon to change.

A

Connect the printer and computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.

When the [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box appears, check that [ This wizard helps you install software for: (Unknown) ] is displayed.

B

Select the [ Install from a list on specific location (Advanced) ] check box, and then click [ Next > ].

C

When the message “Please choose your search and installation option.” appears, select the [ Search for the best driver in these locations.

] check box, and then select the [ Include this location in the search: ] check box.

D

To disable Auto Run, press the left { Shift } key when inserting the CD-

ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.

If Auto Run starts, click [ Cancel ] , and then [ Exit ] .

E

Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored, and then click [ Next ].

If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the following location:

• RPCS

D:\DRIVES\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

66

Preparing for Printing

• PCL 5c

D:\DRIVES\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

• PCL 6

D:\DRIVES\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

• PostScript 3

D:\DRIVES\PS3\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

When installation is complete, the printer connected to “1394_00n” appears in the [ Printers and Faxes ] window. (“n” shows the number of printers connected.)

F

Follow the instructions.

If the printer driver has already been installed, the printer icon is added to the [ Printers and Faxes ] window. In this case, printer driver installation is not necessary.

Even if the printer driver is already installed, the message “ Found New

Hardware Wizard” may appear when the printer and the computer are connected using the IEEE 1394 interface cable for the first time. If it does, install the printer driver.

If printing does not work properly after the installation, delete the port and reinstall the printer driver. For details, see “Printer Does Not Print”, Maintenance Guide.

If you do not want to install the printer when Found New Hardware Wizard starts under an operating system that supports SCSI print, disable the device by following the procedure below

A When the [ Found New Hardware Wizard ] dialog box appears, check that

[ This wizard helps you install software for: Unknown ] displayed, select [ Install from a list on specific location (Advanced) ] check box, and then click [ Next > ] .

B When the message “Please choose your search and installation option.” appears, clear all check boxes from [ Search for the best driver in these locations.

] , and then click [ Next > ] .

C When the message “The wizard could not find the software on your computer for.” appears, click [ OK ] .

D When the message “Cannot Install this Hardware” appears, select the

[ Don't prompt again to install the software ] check box, and then click [ Finish ] .

67

Preparing for Printing

Printing with Bluetooth Connection

Supported Profiles

SPP, HCRP

• A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers can be connected at the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by

SPP, one by HCRP.

• When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer at the same time, the first device that establishes connection is selected. When selecting the connection between the other devices, cancel the first established connection.

• Conditions for bidirectional communications

• SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.

• HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.

BIP

• Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected via BIP.

• Only JPEG images that can be printed using BIP.

• User codes are disabled for BIP.

You cannot print if print functions are restricted.

• Some printers do not support BIP.

Printing with Bluetooth Connection

To install the printer driver, follow the procedure used to install parallel interface.

To install the printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows

Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

System requirements vary depending on the Bluetooth standard and specifications. For details, see the manuals provided with each product.

For information about setting up Bluetooth under other operating systems or using it with different utilities, see the manuals provided with those operating systems or utilities.

A

Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.

68

Preparing for Printing

B

Check that the printer you want to use appears in 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.

C

On the [ Tool ] menu, click [ COM port ].

D

Check that the message “Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx) “ appears under Client Ports. (X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.)

E

Click [ Close ].

F

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

G

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

H

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

I

Click the [ Ports ] tab.

J

Under [ Port ], select the [ COMx: ] check box. X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.

K

Click [ OK ].

Close the [ Printers ] window.

If a dialog box appears while transmitting a print job, reestablish network connection as follows:

A Select the printer you want to use in the [ Printers and Faxes ] box.

B Click [ Connect ] .

To always use the same printer, select the [ Always use for this connection ] check box.

For details, see the manuals provided with the Bluetooth adaptor or computer equipped with Bluetooth.

Configuring Security Mode Settings

A

Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.

B

On the [ Tools ] menu, click [ Security Mode ].

The [ Security Mode ] dialog box appears.

C

Select the security mode in the [ Security Mode: ] list.

69

Preparing for Printing

If you click [ High ] , or [ Custom ] , and specify [ Link ] in the [ Custom Settings ] dialog box, enter the Bluetooth password. For information about entering the password, see

p.70 “Printing in the Security Mode”

.

For all other security modes and custom settings, no password is required.

For information about each mode, see the manuals provided with the utility.

D

Click [ OK ].

Close the [ Security Mode ] dialog box.

For details about the security mode, see 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager Help. For details about the password entry which is required to trans-

mit print jobs, see p.70 “Printing in the Security Mode”

.

Printing in the Security Mode

A

Send the print job to the printer in use.

Depending on the computer configuration, the [ Connect ] dialog box may appear. If it does, use it to establish the network connection.

B

The [ Authentication ] dialog box appears.

C

Enter the Bluetooth password, and then click [ OK ].

As the Bluetooth password, enter the last four digits of the printer's serial number. You can find the serial number on the label on the back of the printer. For example, if the serial number is 00A0-001234, the Bluetooth password is

1234.

D

The print job is sent.

The Bluetooth password differs for each printer and cannot be changed.

70

Preparing for Printing

If a Message Appears during Installation

Message number 58 or 34 indicates the printer driver cannot be installed using

Auto Run. Install the printer driver using [ Add Printer ] or [ >Install Printer ] .

For Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4.0:

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

B

Double-click the Add Printer icon.

C

Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.

If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is either \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME, \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP, or

\DRIVERS\RPCS\NT4. If the installer starts, click [ Cancel ] to quit.

For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003:

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

B

Click [ Add a printer ].

C

Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.

If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP. If the installer starts, click [ Cancel ] to quit.

For Windows XP Home Editions:

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Control Panel ].

B

Click [ Printers and Other Hardware ].

C

Click [ Printers and Faxes ].

D

Click [ Install Printer ].

E

Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.

If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver is \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP. If the installer starts, click [ Cancel ] to quit.

71

Preparing for Printing

Making Option Settings for the Printer

Make option settings for the printer using the printer driver when bidirectional communication is disabled.

For details about making option settings for the printer, see p.73 “If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled” .

Conditions for Bidirectional Communication

Bidirectional communication allows information about paper size and feed direction settings to be automatically sent to the printer. You can check printer status from your computer.

• Bidirectional communication is supported by Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP,

Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.

• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional communication is enabled under Windows 2000, the [ Change Accessories ] tab is unavailable.

The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional communications and updates the printer status automatically.

The PCL printer driver supports bidirectional communications. You can update printer status manually.

The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional communications.

To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:

When connected with parallel cables

• The computer must support bidirectional communication.

• The printer must support bidirectional communication.

• The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.

• The printer must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel cables and parallel connectors.

• Under Windows 2000, [ Enable bidirectional support ] must be selected, and

[ Enable printer pooling ] must not be selected on the [ Port ] tab with the RPCS printer driver.

When connected with the network

• The printer must support bidirectional communication.

• SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and TCP/IP must be used.

72

Preparing for Printing

• Under Windows 2000, [ Enable bidirectional support ] must be selected, and

[ Enable printer pooling ] must not be selected on the [ Port ] tab with the RPCS printer driver.

• In addition to the above, one of the following conditions must also be met:

• The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port and the TCP/IP protocol must be used.

• The standard TCP/IP port must be used without changing the default port name (for Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003).

• Microsoft TCP/IP print IP address must be specified for use (for Windows NT 4.0).

• IPP port name must include the IP address when using the IPP protocol.

When connected with IEEE 1394

• The computer must support bidirectional communication.

• The printer must be connected to the IEEE 1394 connector of a computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.

• [ Activate ] must be selected in the SCSI print of IEEE 1394 and [ Activate ] must be selected in the Bidi-SCSI print.

• Under Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003, [ Enable bidirectional support ] must be selected, and [ Enable printer pooling ] must not be selected on the [ Port ] tab with RPCS printer driver.

When connected with USB

The printer must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable.

The computer must support bidirectional communication.

Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM provided.

If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled

Set up option settings when bidirectional communications are disabled.

Under Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer properties in the [ Printers ] folder. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.

Under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control permission is required to change the printer properties in the [ Printers ] folder. Log on as an Administrators or Power

Users group member.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

73

Preparing for Printing

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

D

Click the [ Accessories ] tab.

If options in the [ Change Accessories ] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection is enabled. In this case, no change is necessary for option settings.

If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [ Change Accessories ] tab.

If you are using the PS printer driver, click the [ Device Settings ] tab.

E

Select options installed from the [ Option ] area, and then make the necessary settings.

F

Select the total amount of the memory in [ Total Memory: ], when the optional SDRAM module is added.

G

Under [ Paper source tray settings ], click and highlight the tray to be used, and then select the appropriate size, position, and type for the tray. Select the [ Tray locking ] check box to exclude the tray from the targets of automatic tray selection.

H

Click [ OK ] to close the printer properties dialog box. Click the [ Defaults ] tab, and then click [ Change Accessories ] to display the option selection.

74

Setting Up the Printer Driver

PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties

There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.

Making printer default settings

To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from the [ Printers ] window.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

G1307502_1.00

Copyright © 2005

75

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see the printer driver Help.

76

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.

The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Apply ] to start printing.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

77

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer

Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

78

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.

The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Apply ] to start printing.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

79

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Default

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Document Defaults ].

The [ Default ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.

80

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

81

Setting Up the Printer Driver

RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties

There are two dialog box types of the printer properties dialog box.

“Multi-tab” is used as an example in this manual. For details about changing the dialog box types, see the printer driver Help.

Multi-tab

This dialog box type is designed for users who often change print settings to perform various printing operations.

Custom Setting

This dialog box type is designed for users who rarely change print settings.

This type of dialog box may vary depending on the installed options.

Making printer default settings

To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from the [ Printers ] window.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the

RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [ OK ] , the printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

For details, see the printer driver Help.

82

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.

The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

83

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the

RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [ OK ] , the printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.

84

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Apply ] to start printing.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer

Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the

RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [ OK ] , the printer properties dialog box appears.

85

Setting Up the Printer Driver

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.

The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

86

Setting Up the Printer Driver

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Apply ] to start printing.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the

RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [ OK ] , the printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see the printer driver Help.

87

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Making printer default settings - Default

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Document Defaults...

].

The [ Default ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.

The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

88

Setting Up the Printer Driver

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Apply ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

89

Setting Up the Printer Driver

PostScript 3 - Setting Up for Printing

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties

There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.

Making printer default settings

To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from the [ Printers ] window.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

E

Click [ OK ].

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.

The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

90

Setting Up the Printer Driver

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

91

Setting Up the Printer Driver

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.

The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Print ] to start printing.

92

Setting Up the Printer Driver

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer

Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the

Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxes ].

The [ Printers and Faxes ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Printing Preferences...

].

The [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box appears.

93

Setting Up the Printer Driver

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.

The procedure to open the [ Printing Preferences ] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print...

].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Select Printer ] list.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ Print ] to start printing.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Making printer default settings - the printer properties

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

94

Setting Up the Printer Driver

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears .

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Do not make a setting for [ Form to Tray Assignment ] .

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer default settings - Default

To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default.

You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, point to [ Settings ], and then click [ Printers ].

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Document Defaults ].

The [ Default ] dialog box appears.

D

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Making printer settings from an application

You can make printer settings for a specific application.

95

Setting Up the Printer Driver

To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.

The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.

With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.

Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.

General users can change the properties displayed in the [ Print ] dialog box of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application.

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

Make the necessary settings, and then click [ OK ].

D

Click [ OK ] to start printing.

For details, see the printer driver Help.

Mac OS - Setting Up for Printing

Making paper settings from an application

A

Open the file you want to print.

B

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Page Setup ].

C

Check that the printer you want to use is displayed in [ Format for: ], and then select the paper size you want to use in [ Paper ].

Under Mac OS X, select the paper size in [ Paper Size ] .

If the printer you want to use is not displayed in [ Format for: ] , select the printer you want to use.

96

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The [ Page Setup ] dialog box varies depending on the application you use.

For details, see the manuals provided with the Mac OS.

D

Configure the settings, and then click [ OK ].

Setting up for printing from an application

A

Open the file you want to print.

B

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ].

C

Check that the printer is selected in the [ Printer ] list, and then make the printer settings.

D

Configure the settings, and then click [ OK ].

97

Other Print Operations

Printing a PDF File Directly

You can send a PDF file directly to this printer to print, without opening the application it was created in.

This is possible for Adobe PDF files only.

You can use this function more conveniently with the attached hard disk.

PDF files of versions 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5 are supported.

Transparency and JBIG2 which are functions of version 1.4 are not supported.

Functions of 1.5 file format are not supported.

Using DeskTopBinder Lite

PDF files added with DeskTopBinder Lite can be sent directly to this printer for printing.

The RPCS printer driver must be installed.

PDF Direct Print is not available with some versions of DeskTopBinder Lite.

Use DeskTopBinder Lite installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.

PDF Direct Print settings can be made from PDF Direct Print properties.

You must configure the port before you can use DeskTopBinder Lite.

For details, see DeskTopBinder Lite Help.

Installing DeskTopBinder Lite

Follow the procedure below to install DeskTopBinder Lite.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this case, launch “Setup.exe” located on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

G1307502_1.00

Copyright © 2005

98

Other Print Operations

D

Click [ DeskTopBinder Lite ] , and then click [ Next ].

E

Follow the instructions on the display to install DeskTopBinder Lite.

If you are required to restart the computer after installing DeskTopBinder Lite, restart the computer and continue the configuration.

DeskTopBinder Lite Enhancements

Follow the DeskTopBinder Lite enhancement procedure to print PDF files directly.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Programs ], [ DeskTopBinder ], and [ Extended Features

Wizard ].

B

When [ Extended Features Wizard ] appears, select [ Start ], and then click [ Next ] repeatedly until the [ Printing Functions3 ] screen appears.

C

On the [ Printing Functions3 ] screen, click [ Add ] to display [ PDF Direct Print

Properties ].

D

Select Driver for This Machine, click [ OK ], and then click [ Next ] repeatedly until [ Finish ] is displayed.

Click [ Finish ] .

Function Palette

The Function palette contains buttons for functions that are already configured through DeskTopBinder Lite enhancement. Using these buttons, you can print

Windows files, preview printouts, convert images, and register scanners for documents without having to open DeskTopBinder Lite. You can also use these functions simply by dragging a target file to the button corresponding to the required function and dropping it there.

A

On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Programs ], [ DeskTopBinder ], and [ Function Palette ].

An icon for the Function palette is added to the task bar displayed at the bottom right of the screen.

B

Right-click the icon that is added to the task bar, and then click [ Properties ] to display the Properties screen.

C

Click the [ Contents ] tab, select the [ PDF Direct Printing ] check box at the center, and then click [ OK ].

The [ Properties ] screen closes and the [ PFD Direct Printing ] icon is added to the palette.

PDF Direct Printing

Use the method below to print PDF files directly.

99

Other Print Operations

A

Drag the PDF file you want to print to the PDF Direct Printing icon in the palette and drop it there.

B

[ Output File List-PDF Direct Print ] is displayed.

Highlight the PDF you want to print, and then click [ OK ] .

The PDF file is printed.

Printing PDF Password-Protected Documents

Follow the procedure below to print password-protected PDF files.

A

In the Windows [ Start ] menu, click [ Programs ], [ DeskTopBinder ], and [ Extended Features Wizard ].

B

When [ Extended Features Wizard ] appears, select [ Start ], and then click [ Next ] repeatedly until the [ Printing Functions3 ] screen appears.

C

On the [ Printing Functions3 ] screen, click [ Properties...

] to display [ PDF Direct

Print Properties ].

D

Select the [ Use PDF Password ] check box at the bottom right of the screen, and then click [ OK ].

Click [ Next ] repeatedly until [ Finish ] appears.

Click [ Finish ] to close the [ Extended Features Wizard ] screen.

E

Move the PDF file you want to print to the PDF Direct Printing icon on the palette using a drag-and-drop operation.

F

[ Output File List-PDF Direct Print ] is displayed.

Select the PDF file you want to output to make it reverse video, and then click

[ OK ] .

G

The [ PDF Direct Print Properties ] screen opens.

Enter the password for the PDF file you want to print in the [ PDF Password ] field at the bottom right of the screen, and then click [ OK ] .

The password-protected PDF file is printed.

Before printing a password-protected PDF file, perform one of the following:

• Enter the PDF password in the PDF Direct Printing Properties screen

• Specify a PDF password by selecting [ Change Password ] in the [ PDF Configuration ] menu on the control panel of this machine

100

Other Print Operations

If a [ Group Password ] for the [ PDF Configuration ] menu is assigned to either

DeskTopBinder Lite or the control panel of this machine, a same group password needs to be assigned to the other.

PDF Direct Print Properties

1.

Configuration Name

Displays the plug-in configuration name (up to 63 single byte characters)

2.

Change Icon

Change the icon displayed on the tool bar.

3.

Printer Name

Displays a list of RPCS drivers that support PDF direct printing.

4.

Duplex

Print on both sides of sheets.

5.

Layout

Print multiple pages on a single sheet.

6.

Punch

Punch holes in output sheets.

7.

Staples

Staple together output sheets.

8.

“Display this dialog box before printing” Dialog box

Appears in PDF direct printing mode if this check box is selected.

9.

Orientation

Specify the original's orientation.

10.

Number of Copies

Specify the number of copies to print.

11.

Collate

Use to sort prints.

101

Other Print Operations

12.

Range

Specify the print area on each page.

13.

Color/Black and White

Specify color or black-and-white printing.

14.

Resolution

Specify a print resolution.

15.

PDF Password

If the PDF file is password-protected, enter the password in this field. Otherwise, the file cannot be printed.

16.

Group Password

If a group password is assigned to DeskTopBinder Lite and this machine, enter the group password in this field. Otherwise, printing cannot start.

Using Commands

Under Windows and UNIX, you can print PDF files directly, using commands such as “ftp” and “lpr”.

For details about printing using commands under Windows, see p.285 “Printing Files Directly from Windows” .

For details about printing using commands under UNIX, see UNIX Supplement.

102

Other Print Operations

Unauthorized Copy Control

You can embed patterns and text when printing to prevent unauthorized copying of the document. Unauthorized Copy Control consists of [ Data security for copying ] and [ Mask type ] .

This function is designed to discourage copying confidential documents; it does not prevent unauthorized use of information.

Using [ Data security for copying ]

You can embed a pattern by setting in the printer driver.

Setting

[

Data security for copying

]

in the Printer Driver

• Select the [ Data security for copying ] checkbox. You can also enter the text in the [ Text ] box.

• You cannot select the [ Mask type ] checkbox at the same time.

103

Other Print Operations

Printing a document using

[

Data security for copying

]

1.

The print preview of the pattern and the text you set is displayed.

2.

The document is copied to the machine that the Copy Data Security unit is installed.

3.

The document is blanked by gray overprint.

For details about setting [ Data security for copying ] , see Printer Driver Help.

Only the RPCS printer driver is supported.

You cannot partially embed a pattern and text in a document.

Use 182

×

257 mm (7 1 /

4

×

10 1 /

2

) or larger paper.

Use ordinary or recycled paper that has at least 70% whiteness.

Duplex printing may interfere with the function due to text and patterns being visible through the paper.

104

Other Print Operations

Using [ Mask type ]

You can embed patterns and text in a document by setting in the printer driver to prevent unauthorized copying.

Setting

[

Mask type

]

in the Printer Driver

• Select a pattern from [ Mask type ] , and then enter text in the [ Text ] box.

You can set only [ Text ] , but [ Mask type ] and [ Text ] must be set together.

Printing a Document Using

[

Mask type

]

1.

The print preview of the pattern and the text you set is displayed.

2.

The document is copied to the copier or the multifunction machine.

3.

The pattern and the text you set appear.

For details about setting [ Mask type ] , see Printer Driver Help.

105

Other Print Operations

Only the RPCS printer driver is supported.

You cannot partially embed patterns and text strings in a document.

The results of copying may vary depending on the machine model and setting conditions.

Printing with background patterns and text may be slower than normal printing.

Important Notice

• Ricoh does not provide warranty regarding the appearance of print patterns and other copy protection features. The appearance of the print patterns and the performance of Unauthorized Copy Control may vary depending on the quality of paper used and the machine model and settings.

• Ricoh takes no responsibility for any damages sustained in connection with use of or inability to make use of Unauthorized Copy Control print patterns.

106

Other Print Operations

Sample Print

Use this function to print the first set of a multiple-set print job. After checking the results, the remaining sets can be printed using the control panel. This function can protect you from printing a large quantity of misprints.

To use this function, the hard disk must be installed on the printer.

The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the contents of the print images. At most, the printer can save 100 jobs or 9,000 pages for

Sample Print and Locked Print. At most, the printer can store up to 1,000 pages for 1 job.

If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.

Sample Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been executed or deleted using the Web browser before you select “Sample

Print“ from the control panel.

Sample Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor, after you select [ Sample Print ] using the control panel will appear on the display panel.

However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those Sample Print files.

You can identify the file you want to print by the user ID and the time when the job was stored.

If the first set of the Sample Print file is not as you expected and you do not want to print the remaining sets, delete the Sample Print file using the control panel or Web Image Monitor.

The job in the printer is deleted automatically after all Sample Print files are printed.

Follow the procedure below to use this function with the PCL or RPCS printer driver under Windows. If you want to use this function under Mac OS, see

p.300 “Using PostScript 3” .

For details about settings for the printer driver, see the printer driver Help.

Files specified for Sample Print can be printed or deleted using Web Image

Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

Printing the First Set

A

From an application, select a command to print.

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

107

Other Print Operations

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

The printer properties dialog box appears.

C

In the [ Job Type: ] box, click [ Sample Print ].

D

In the [ User ID: ] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric characters.

This is used to identify the user. The user ID can be entered using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.

E

Execute a command to print.

The job is saved on the hard disk.

F

Check the print job, and then use the control panel to print the remaining sets or delete them.

p.108 “Printing the Remaining Sets”

p.109 “Deleting a Sample Print File”

Printing the Remaining Sets

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Sample Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Print One File ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to print, and then press the { # Enter } key.

108

Other Print Operations

The number of remaining sets appears.

To cancel printing, press the { Escape } key.

E

Press the { # Enter } key. To change the number of sets you want to print, press the {U} or {T} key and select the number of sets, and then press the { # Enter } key.

The "Go to Menu, then ->[Esc] to print" message appears. Then the document selection screen reappears.

After the job is printed, the job saved on the hard disk is deleted.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Deleting a Sample Print File

Deleting a selected file only

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Sample Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Delete One File ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to delete, and then press the { # Enter } key.

To cancel deleting a Sample Print file, press the { Escape } key.

E

Check the file you want to delete is displayed, and then press the { # Enter } key.

F

Press the { Online } key.

109

Other Print Operations

The initial screen appears.

Deleting all files

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Sample Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Del. All Files ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to confirm deleting all files, and then press the

{ # Enter } key.

To cancel deleting a Sample Print file, press the { Escape } key.

E

Press the { # Enter } key.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Checking the Error Log

When a print job is not saved on the hard disk, it remains in the error log and can be checked using the control panel.

The latest 30 error files are stored in the error log. If a new error file is added when there are 30 error files already stored, the oldest file is deleted. However, if the oldest error file is a sample print file, it is not deleted, but stored instead in the sample print error log until the number of sample print error files reaches 30.

If you turn off the power, the logs will be deleted.

110

Other Print Operations

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Sample Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Error File(s) ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to check the log.

To print error files, either print or delete the file saved on the hard disk, and then print the file from the computer again.

E

When you finish checking the error log, press the { Escape } key.

The Sample Print job selection screen appears.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

111

Other Print Operations

Locked Print

Use this function to print confidential documents. Documents will not be printed automatically unless a password is entered using the control panel.

To use this function, the hard disk must be installed on the printer.

The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the print image content. At most, the printer can store 30 jobs or 1,100 pages for Sample

Print and Locked Print. At most, the printer can store a maximum of 1,000 pages for a single job.

If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.

Locked Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor before you select [ Locked

Print ] using the control panel.

Locked Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you have selected [ Locked Print ] using the control panel will still appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those

Locked Print files.

Print jobs are not saved on the hard disk in the following cases. You can check the error log for jobs not saved.

• When there are 30 Sample Print and Locked Print jobs saved on the hard disk.

• When the total number of pages saved on the hard disk exceeds 1,000 pages.

You can identify the file you want to print by the user ID and the time when the job was stored.

After the Locked Print file is printed, the job in the printer is deleted automatically.

Follow the procedure below to use this function with the PCL or RPCS printer driver under Windows. If you want to use this function under Mac OS, see

p.300 “Using PostScript 3” .

For details about settings for the printer driver, see the printer driver Help.

Files specified for Locked Print can be printed or deleted using Web Image

Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

Sending Print Job to the Printer

A

From an application, select a command to print.

112

Other Print Operations

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

C

In the [ Job Type: ] box, click [ Locked Print ].

D

In the [ User ID: ] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric characters.

This is used to identify the user. The user ID can be entered using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.

E

In the [ Password: ] box, enter a four to eight digit password (0-9).

F

Execute a command to print.

The job is saved on the hard disk.

G

Enter the password using the control panel, and then specify whether to print or delete the job.

p.113 “Entering a Password”

p.114 “Deleting a Locked Print File”

Entering a Password

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Locked Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Print One File ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

113

Other Print Operations

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to print, and then press the { # Enter } key.

E

Enter the password. Press the {U} or {T} key to enter the leftmost digit of the password, and then press the { # Enter } key.

F

The next digit appears.

G

Repeat steps to enter all the digits of the password, and then press the

{ # Enter } key.

To cancel printing, press the { Escape } key.

H

Check that the file you want to print is displayed, and then press the { #

Enter } key.

I

Press the { # Enter } key.

The " Go to Menu, then ->[Esc] to print " message appears. Then the document selection screen reappears.

After the job is printed, the job saved on the hard disk is deleted.

J

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Deleting a Locked Print File

Deleting a selected file only

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Locked Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Delete One File ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

114

Other Print Operations

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to delete, and then press the { # Enter } key.

To cancel deleting a Locked Print file, press the { Escape } key.

E

Check that the file you want to delete is displayed, and then press the { #

Enter } key.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Deleting all files

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Locked Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Del. All Files ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to confirm deleting all files, and then press the

{ # Enter } key.

To cancel deleting a Locked Print file, press the { Escape } key.

E

Press the { # Enter } key.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

115

Other Print Operations

Checking the Error Log

When a print job is not saved on the hard disk, it remains in the error log and can be checked using the control panel.

The latest 50 error files are stored in the error log. If a new error file is added when there are 50 error files already stored, the oldest file is deleted. However, if the oldest error file is a sample print file, it is not deleted, but stored instead in the sample print error log until the number of sample print error files reaches 20.

If you turn off the power, the logs will be deleted.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Locked Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Error File(s) ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to check the log.

To print error files, either print or delete the file saved on the hard disk, and then print the file from the computer again.

E

When you finish checking the error log, press the { Escape } key.

The Locked Print job selection screen appears.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

116

Other Print Operations

Hold Print

Use this function to print documents that have been temporarily stored in this printer by performing either the control panel or computer operation.

To use this function, the hard disk must be installed on the printer.

The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the print image content. At most, the printer can store 100 jobs or 1,000 pages for Hold

Print and Stored Print. At most, the printer can store a maximum of 9000 pages for a single job.

The saved documents sent to the printer are not deleted unless you select

[ Auto Del. Temp ] or [ Auto Del. Stored ] . For details, see “Auto Del. Temp” or “Auto

Del. Stored”.

Hold Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor before you select Hold Print using the control panel.

Hold Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you have selected [ Hold Print ] using the control panel will still appear on the display panel.

However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those Hold

Print files.

Print jobs are not saved on the hard disk in the following cases. You can check the error log for jobs not saved.

• When there are 30 Hold Print and Stored Print jobs saved on the hard disk.

• When the total number of pages saved on the hard disk exceeds 1,000 pages.

You can identify the file you want to print by the user ID and the time when the job was stored.

After the Hold Print file is printed, the job in the printer is deleted automatically.

Follow the procedure below to use this function with the PCL printer driver or

RPCS printer driver under Windows. If you want to use this function under

Mac OS,

p.300 “Using PostScript 3” .

For details about settings for the printer driver, see the printer driver Help.

Files specified for Hold Print can be printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

Hold Print Job to the Printer

A

From an application, select a command to print.

117

Other Print Operations

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

C

In the [ Job Type: ] box, click [ Hold Print ].

D

In the [ User ID: ] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric characters.

This is used to identify the user. The user ID can be entered using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.

You can assign a filename to a saved document, but it is not mandatory.

E

Execute a command to print.

The job is saved on the hard disk.

p.113 “Entering a Password”

p.114 “Deleting a Locked Print File”

Print Using the Control Panel

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Hold Print ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Print One File ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

To cancel printing, press the { Escape } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to print, and then press the { # Enter } key.

118

Other Print Operations

The " Go to Menu, then ->[Esc] to print " message appears. Then the document selection screen reappears.

After the job is printed, the job saved on the hard disk is deleted.

E

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Deleting a Hold Print File

Deleting a selected file only

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Hold Print ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Delete One File ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to delete, and then press the { # Enter } key.

To cancel deleting a Hold Print file, press the { Escape } key.

E

Check that the file you want to delete is displayed, and then press the { #

Enter } key.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

119

Other Print Operations

Deleting all files

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Hold Print ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Del. All Files ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to confirm deleting all files, and then press the

{ # Enter } key.

To cancel deleting a Hold Print file, press the { Escape } key.

E

Press the { # Enter } key.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Checking the Error Log

When a print job is not saved on the hard disk, it remains in the error log and can be checked using the control panel.

The latest 30 error files are stored in the error log. If a new error file is added when there are 30 error files already stored, the oldest file is deleted. However, if the oldest error file is a sample print file, it is not deleted, but stored instead in the sample print error log until the number of sample print error files reaches 30.

If you turn off the power, the logs will be deleted.

120

Other Print Operations

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Hold Print ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Error File(s) ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to check the log.

To print error files, either print or delete the file saved on the hard disk, and then print the file from the computer again.

E

When you finish checking the error log, press the { Escape } key.

The Locked Print job selection screen appears.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

121

Other Print Operations

Stored Print

This function stores documents in the machine. Printing is then possible using a control panel or computer operation.

To use this function, the hard disk must be installed on the printer.

The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the print image content. At most, the printer can store 100 jobs or 1,000 pages for Hold

Print and Stored Print. At most, the printer can store a maximum of 9000 pages for a single job.

The saved documents sent to the printer are not deleted unless you select

[ Auto Del. Temp ] or [ Auto Del. Stored ] . For details, see “Auto Del. Temp” or “Auto

Del. Stored”.

Stored Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor before you select Stored Print using the control panel.

Stored Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you have selected [ Stored Print ] using the control panel will still appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those

Stored Print files.

Print jobs are not saved on the hard disk in the following cases. You can check the error log for jobs not saved.

• When there are 30 Stored Print and Stored Print jobs saved on the hard disk.

• When the total number of pages saved on the hard disk exceeds 1,000 pages.

You can identify the file you want to print by the user ID and the time when the job was stored.

After the Stored Print file is printed, the job in the printer is deleted automatically.

Follow the procedure below to use this function with the PCL printer driver or

RPCS printer driver under Windows. If you want to use this function under

Mac OS,

p.300 “Using PostScript 3” .

For details about settings for the printer driver, see the printer driver Help.

Files specified for Stored Print can be printed or deleted using Web Image

Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

122

Other Print Operations

Stored Print Job to the Printer

A

From an application, select a command to print.

The [ Print ] dialog box appears.

B

Select the printer you want to use in the [ Name ] list, and then click [ Properties ].

C

In the [ Job Type: ] box, click [ Save to Printer ].

D

In the [ User ID: ] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric characters.

This is used to identify the user. The user ID can be entered using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.

You can assign a password and filename to a saved document, but both are not mandatory.

E

Execute a command to print.

The job is saved on the hard disk.

p.113 “Entering a Password”

p.114 “Deleting a Locked Print File”

Print Using the Control Panel

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Stored Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Print One File ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

123

Other Print Operations

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

To cancel printing, press the { Escape } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to print, and then press the { # Enter } key.

The " Go to Menu, then ->[Esc] to print " message appears. Then the document selection screen reappears.

If a password is assigned to the document, a password entry screen appears.

Enter the password.

E

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Deleting a Stored Print File

Deleting a selected file only

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Stored Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Delete One File ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to delete, and then press the { # Enter } key.

To cancel deleting a Stored Print file, press the { Escape } key.

E

Check that the file you want to delete is displayed, and then press the { #

Enter } key.

124

Other Print Operations

If a password is assigned to the document, a password entry screen appears.

Enter the password.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Deleting all files

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Stored Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Del. All Files ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to confirm deleting all files, and then press the

{ # Enter } key.

To cancel deleting a Stored Print file, press the { Escape } key.

E

Press the { # Enter } key.

If a password is assigned to the document, a password entry screen appears.

Enter the password.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Checking the Error Log

When a print job is not saved on the hard disk, it remains in the error log and can be checked using the control panel.

125

Other Print Operations

The latest 30 error files are stored in the error log. If a new error file is added when there are 30 error files already stored, the oldest file is deleted. However, if the oldest error file is a sample print file, it is not deleted, but stored instead in the sample print error log until the number of sample print error files reaches 30.

If you turn off the power, the logs will be deleted.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Stored Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Error File(s) ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to check the log.

To print error files, either print or delete the file saved on the hard disk, and then print the file from the computer again.

E

When you finish checking the error log, press the { Escape } key.

The Locked Print job selection screen appears.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

126

Other Print Operations

Form Feed

This message appears when the paper tray is empty, or when the paper in the paper tray is not of the same size or form as that specified by the printer driver.

You can form feed using tray.

A

Press the { Form Feed } key, and then select the paper tray on the screen.

B

Press the { # Enter } key.

The job is printed from the selected tray.

127

Other Print Operations

Canceling a Print Job

You can cancel printing from either the printer or a client computer. Since canceling procedures vary depending on the print job status, check the job status and cancel printing according to the following procedure.

Windows - Canceling a Print Job

When the printer is connected to multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel other users' print jobs.

If the print job you want to cancel is being printed

A

Check if the print job you want to cancel is currently being printed.

While the print job may not be being printed, the printer is receiving data if the

Data In indicator is lit or blinking.

B

Press the { Job Reset } key.

The [ Job Reset?

] screen appears.

C

Select the current job or all jobs (including the current job) using the {U} or {T} key.

It is also possible to annul the cancellation. Printing resumes if you select [ Resume Print ] , and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Press the { # Enter } key.

A confirmation message appears.

Printing resumes if you press the { Escape } key after the message appears.

E

Press the { # Enter } key.

The job is canceled. When the cancellation procedure is complete, a message appears.

A print job that contains a large volume of data may take considerable time to cancel.

If printing resumes after being canceled, the period of time set for [ I/O Timeout ] is too short. Set a longer period of time for [ I/O Timeout ] on the [ Host

Interface ] menu.

128

Other Print Operations

If the print job you want to cancel is not being printed

A

Double-click the printer icon on the Windows task tray.

A window appears showing all print jobs that are currently queuing to be printed. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.

You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the printer icon in the [ Printer ] window.

B

Select the name of the job you want to cancel.

C

On the [ Document ] menu, click [ Cancel Printing ].

When this printer is used as a network printer, other users' print jobs cannot be canceled from a client computer.

Clicking [ Purge Print Documents ] on the [ Printer ] menu deletes all currently queued print jobs. However, when this printer is used as a network printer, print jobs from other users' computer cannot be canceled from a client computer.

When the print job you selected starts printing, it takes some time before the print job disappears from the printer window.

Mac OS - Canceling a Print Job

When the printer is connected to multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel other users' print jobs.

If the print job you want to cancel is being printed

A

Check if the print job you want to cancel is currently being printed.

While the print job may not be being printed, the printer is receiving data if the

Data In indicator is lit or blinking.

B

Press the { Job Reset } key.

[ Job Reset?

] screen appears.

C

Select the current job or all jobs (including the current job) using the {U} or {T} key.

It is also possible to annul the cancellation. Printing resumes if you select [ Resume Print ] , and then press { # Enter } key.

D

Press the { # Enter } key.

A confirmation message appears.

129

Other Print Operations

Printing resumes if you press the { Escape } key after the message appears.

E

Press the { # Enter } key.

The job is canceled. When the cancellation procedure is complete, a message appears.

A print job that contains a large volume of data may take considerable time to cancel.

To secure enough time for sending a command to cancel printing, set a long period of time in [ I/O Timeout ] on the [ Host Interface ] menu.

If the print job you want to cancel is not being printed

A

Double-click the printer icon on the desktop.

A window appears showing all print jobs that are currently queuing to be printed. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.

Under Mac OS X, start Print Center.

B

Select the name of the job you want to cancel.

C

Click the pause icon, and then click the trash icon.

When this printer is used as a network printer, other users' print jobs cannot be canceled from a client computer.

130

Other Print Operations

Caution During Printing

Staple and Punch Position

By installing the 2 tray finisher or booklet finisher, you can staple one set at a time when printing multiple copies. See the Help files of the printer driver for details about print methods.

The printer cannot staple paper fed from the bypass tray.

To use these functions, at least 320 MB of RAM, or the hard disk must be installed on the printer.

Staple output depends on print and feed direction. The following table shows possible staple positions:

Staple Position

• 2 tray finisher

131

Other Print Operations

• Booklet finisher

When two-sided printing is selected, adjust the staple position to the binding direction.

If you are punching at the same time, specify the same side.

The paper sizes and number of pages that can be stapled are displayed below.

• 2 tray finisher

Paper Size

A3, 11”

×

17”, B4, Legal, 8”

×

13”, 8 1 /

2

×

13”, 8 1 /

4

” × 13”, 8K

A4, B5, Letter, 7 1 /

4

” × 10 1 /

2

”, 16K

Staple Capacity

30

50

• Booklet finisher

Paper Size

A3, 11” × 17”, B4, Legal

A4, B5, Letter

Staple Capacity

25

50

If “2 at center” is selected, maximum of 10 pages can be stapled.

132

Other Print Operations

Punching

Used to punch holes in pages.

The printer cannot punch paper fed from the bypass tray.

To use this function, the 2 tray finisher or booklet finisher must be installed on the printer.

Punch positions depend on print and feed direction. The following table shows possible punch positions:

Punch Position

When duplex print is selected, adjust the punch position to the binding direction.

Paper sizes that can be punched are displayed below.

2 tray finisher

Type Feed Direction Paper Size

A4, A5, B5, 16K, Letter

2 holes

K

L

A3, B4, A4, B5, 8K, 11” × 17”,

16K, Legal, Letter, 7 1 /

4

×

10 1 /

2

”, 8 1 /

2

” × 13”, 8 1 /

4

” × 13”,

8” × 13”

133

Other Print Operations

Type

NA 3 holes

EU 4 holes

Northern EU 4 holes

K

L

K

L

K

L

Feed Direction

Booklet finisher

Type

NA 2 holes

NA 3 holes

EU 2 holes

EU 4 holes

Northern EU 4 holes

K

L

K

L

K

L

K

L

K

L

Feed Direction

Paper Size

A4, B5, 16K, Letter

A3, B4, 8K, 11”

×

17”

A4, B5, 16K, Letter

A3, B4, 8K, 11”

×

17”

A4, B5, A5, 16K, Letter

A3, B4, A4, B5, 8K, 16K, 11”

× 17”, Legal, 8 1 /

2

” × 13”, 8

1 /

4

” × 13”, 8” × 13”, Letter,

7 1 /

4

×

10 1 /

2

Paper Size

A4, Letter

A3, A4, B5, 11” × 17”, Legal,

Letter

A4, Letter

A3, 11” × 17”

A4

A3, B4, A4, 11” × 17”, Legal,

Letter

A4

A3

A4, B5, Letter

A3, B4, A4, 11” × 17”, Legal,

Letter

134

Other Print Operations

Collate

The Collate function allows you to print while sorting printouts into page-ordered sets, such as when printing multiple copies of meeting materials.

For details about collate and job separation, see the printer driver Help.

Collate

Output can be assembled as sets in sequential order.

Shift Collate

This function requires the optional 2 Tray Finisher. This function offsets prints, allowing you to easily identify separate jobs.

For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.

To use these functions, at least 320 MB of RAM, or the hard disk must be installed on the printer.

Up to 150 pages can be sorted using RAM. If the hard disk drive is installed, up to 1,000 pages can be sorted.

Spool Printing

With Spool Printing, the print data is saved in the hard disk before printing. To use this function, set it from the menu. See

p.240 “spoolsw” .

Do not turn off the printer or the computer when a print job is being spooled and the Data In indicator is blinking. The print job will remain in the hard disk and be printed when the printer is turned on. The setting can be changed using the “spoolsw clear job” command on the telnet

The Spool Printing function is available when the hard disk is installed.

135

Other Print Operations

The Spool Printing function is available for data received using diprint, lpr, ipp, ftp, and smb.

When using diprint, the Spool Printing function cannot be used with bidirectional communication.

The domain reserved for spool printing is about 1 GB.

When Spool Printing is on, the size of a single print job cannot exceed 500

MB.

When sending print jobs spooled from several computers, up to one diprint job, 10 lpr jobs, one ipp job, one ftp job, and one smb job can be spooled. Jobs exceeding this spooling capacity cannot be executed. It is necessary to wait to add new jobs.

First pages takes longer to print when using spool printing.

With Spool Printing, the computer is freed from print processing earlier, even when processing a large amount of data.

Spool jobs stored in the printer can be viewed or deleted using Web Image

Monitor.

For information about the “spoolsw clear job” command on the telnet, see

p.240 “spoolsw” .

Setting Spool Printing

Spool printing settings can be made using telnet or Web Image Monitor.

• Using Web Image Monitor

In the [ Device Settings ] on the [ Configuration ] menu, click [ System ] .

For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

• Using telnet

Enter “spoolsw spool on”.

For details, see

p.240 “spoolsw” .

Checking or deleting spooled jobs using Web Image Monitor

Follow the procedure below to check or delete spooled jobs using Web Image

Monitor.

A

Open a Web browser.

B

Enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the address bar to access the printer whose settings you want to change.

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

C

Click [ Login ].

The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

136

Other Print Operations

D

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

For details about the password, consult your network administrator.

E

In the menu area, click [ Job ].

A submenu will appear.

F

On the [ Printer ] menu, click [ Spool Printing ].

A list of spooled jobs appears.

G

To delete a job, select the check box of the job you want to delete, and then click [ Delete ].

The selected job is deleted.

H

Quit Web Image Monitor.

For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

Cover

Using this function, you can insert cover fed from a different tray to the body of the document, and print on them.

To use this function, Collate must be set. Rotating Collate can not be set.

The cover sheets should be the same size and orientation as the body of the paper.

If Auto Tray Select is set as the paper feed tray for the body paper, the paper will be delivered from a tray containing paper from a tray containing paper in the portrait direction. Therefore, if the cover paper is set to landscape orientation, the orientation cover and body will be different.

For printing methods, see the printer driver Help.

137

Other Print Operations

Slip Sheets

Inserting a slip sheet between each page

Inserting a slip sheet between OHP transparencies

Collate cannot be set when using slip sheets.

Slip sheets cannot be inserted while duplex and cover printing.

The slip sheet should be the same size and orientation as the main paper.

Memory Capacity and Paper Size

Printable paper sizes and print resolutions vary depending on memory capacity.

Also, printing may or may not be supported in the same condition under certain printing modes. This machine contains the standard 256 MB of memory, but particular printing conditions may require more memory.

138

Other Print Operations

Typical memory requirements for correct printing

Resolution Paper size

1200 dpi ×

1200 dpi

One-sided printing Duplex printing

Mainly text Mainly photograph

Standard

(256 MB)

+64 MB recommended

Mainly text

Standard

(256 MB)

Mainly photograph

+256 MB recommended

1200 dpi ×

600 dpi

A3 (297 ×

457)

DLT (11”

×

17”)

B4 (257 ×

367)

A4 (210

×

297)/Letter

(8 1 /

2

” × 11”)

Legal (8 1 /

2

×

14”)

B5 (182 ×

257)

A5 (148 ×

210)

A3 (297 ×

457)

DLT (11” ×

17”)

B4 (257 ×

367)

A4 (210 ×

297)/Letter

(8 1 /

2

” × 11”)

Legal (8 1 /

2

×

14”)

B5 (182

×

257)

A5 (148 ×

210)

Standard

(256 MB)

Standard

(256 MB)

Standard

(256 MB)

Standard

(256 MB)

+128 MB recommended

+64 MB recommended

Standard

(256 MB)

+64 MB recommended

Standard

(256 MB)

139

Other Print Operations

Resolution Paper size

600 dpi × 600 dpi

300 dpi × 300 dpi

A3 (297 ×

457)

DLT (11”

×

17”)

B4 (257 ×

367)

A4 (210

×

297)/Letter

(8 1 /

2

” × 11”)

Legal (8 1 /

2

×

14”)

B5 (182 ×

257)

A5 (148 ×

210)

One-sided printing Duplex printing

Mainly text Mainly photograph

Standard

(256 MB)

Standard

(256 MB)

Mainly text

Standard

(256 MB)

Mainly photograph

Standard

(256 MB)

Two-sided printing is not possible on 12”

×

18”, postcard-size sheets, and for long printing.

If the bypass tray is used for printing, any duplex printing instruction is reset regardless of memory capacity, and the document is printed in one-sided mode.

140

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

What is PictBridge?

You can connect a PictBridge-compatible digital camera to this machine using a

USB cable. This allows you to print photographs taken using the digital camera directly by operating the digital camera.

Before you can use this function, the printer requires the following options:

• USB host interface board

• Camera direct print card

Check your digital camera is PictBridge-compatible.

For details about installing these options, see the Setup Guide.

Up to 600 images can be sent from the digital camera to the printer during one print transaction. If an attempt is made to send more images, an error message is sent to the camera and printing fails.

Since printing conditions are specified on the digital camera, specifiable parameters depend on the particular digital camera. For details, see your digital camera's manual.

This function is compatible with USB 1.1.

G1307502_1.00

Copyright © 2005

141

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

PictBridge Printing

Follow the procedure below to start PictBridge printing on this machine.

A

Check the printer and the digital camera are both switched on.

B

Connect a USB cable between the optional USB host interface board installed on the print and the digital camera.

The Data In indicator on the printer blinks for several seconds and "PctBrdg" is displayed on the printer. This indicates the printer recognizes the digital camera as a PictBridge device.

Some digital cameras require settings for manual PictBridge operation. For details, see your digital camera's manual.

C

On your digital camera, select the images you want to print, and specify the printing conditions.

Since printing conditions are specified on the digital camera, specifiable parameters depend on the particular digital camera. For details, see the digital camera's manual.

D

The printer receives settings from the digital camera and starts printing.

Do not disconnect the USB cable while data is being sent. If you do, printing will fail.

To stop data printing, see

p.128 “Canceling a Print Job” .

142

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

What Can Be Done on This Machine

This machine can perform the following functions using its PictBridge feature.

The settings available for these functions are as follows:

• Index printing

• Trimming

• Date and file name printing

• Paper size

• Image print size

• Multiple-image printing

• Printing quality

• Color matching

• Form printing

• Camera memo printing

This machine does not support the following settings:

• DPOF printing

• Margin-less printing

• Paper type specification

The setting parameters and their names may vary depending on the digital camera. For details, see your digital camera's manual.

Index Printing

Paper Size

A3 (297

420)

A4 (210

497)

A5 (148

210)

×

×

×

Letter (8 1 /

2

” ×

11”)

Horizontal images

× vertical images (in)

12” × 16”

16”

×

12”

8” × 12”

12” × 8”

5” × 8”

8”

×

5”

8” × 10”

10” × 8”

Paper orien-

K

L

K

L

K

L

K

L tation

143

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

Paper Size

B4 (257

367)

×

Horizontal images

× vertical images (in)

10” × 14”

14”

×

10”

Paper orien-

K

L tation

Index printouts vary depending on the orientation of the paper placed on the specified size tray.

Depending on the digital camera, a form feed may be inserted after one set of images belonging to one type ends.

Trimming

Use this function to print only the inside of the trimming area specified on the digital camera.

*1 -- Trimming area

Date and File Name Printing

Use this function to print the date and/or file name under the image.

144

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

*1 In the above figure, "aaaaa" indicates the file name and "bbbbb" indicates the date.

Paper Size

Use this function to print on paper with the size specified on the digital camera.

Paper size name Actual size

2L (5” ×

7”)

Postcard

*1

178 mm × 127 mm (5 in.

×

7 in.)

148 mm × 100 mm

150 mm × 100 mm 100 mm ×

150 mm *1

4"

×

6" *1

152.4 mm × 101.6 mm (4 in.

×

6 in.)

8" ×

10" *1

Letter (8 1 /

2

×

11)

279.4 mm × 216 mm

(8 1 /

2

× 11)

11" × 17"

254 mm × 203.2 mm

(8 in. × 10 in.)

431.8 mm × 279.4 mm (11in.

×

17in.)

A3

A4

A5

A6 *1

420 mm × 297 mm

297 mm × 210 mm

210 mm

×

148 mm

148 mm

×

105 mm

B4

B5

B6

*1

*1

364 mm × 257 mm

257 mm × 182 mm

182 mm

×

128 mm

*1

Specify Undefined Size for the 2L (5"

×

7"), 100 mm

×

150 mm, 4"

×

6", 8"

×

10", A6,

B5, and B6 sizes.

145

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

For details about methods of specifying undefined sizes, see Maintenance

Guide.

Image Print Size

Use this function to print images with the size specified on the digital camera.

*1 -- Image size specified on the camera

You can specify the following image print sizes:

Fixed size

3.25 " × 2.5 "

5 "

×

2.5 "

6 " × 4 "

7 " × 5 "

10 " × 8 "

254 mm

×

178 mm

110 mm × 74 mm

89 mm × 55 mm

148 mm

×

100 mm

8 cm

×

6 cm

10 cm × 7 cm

13 cm × 9 cm

15 cm × 10 cm

18 cm

×

13 cm

21 cm × 15 cm

24 cm × 18 cm

146

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

An error occurs if the specified size is larger than the actual paper size.

Print Number of Pages

Use this function to print multiple images on the specified paper.

The number of images that can be printed on one page is as follows:

A4

A5

A6

Paper size Number of images that can be specified

2L (5” × 7”) 2, 4, 8, 9

Postcard

100 mm × 150 mm 2, 4

4”

×

6” 2, 4, 8, 9

8” × 10” 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32

Letter (8 1 /

2

” × 11”)

11” × 17”

2, 4

2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32

2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32,

49, 64

A3 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32,

49, 64

2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32

2, 4, 8, 9, 16

2, 4, 8

B4

B5

B6

2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25, 32,

49

2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 25

2, 4, 8, 9

The number and arrangement of images that can be specified are as follows:

147

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

25

32

36

49

64

2

4

8

9

16

Number of images

Vertical images

×

horizontal images

2 × 1

2

×

2

4 × 2

3 × 3

4 × 4

5

×

5

8 × 4

6 × 6

7 × 7

8

×

8

Paper orientation

L

L

L

K

K

L

K

L

L

L

A form feed may be inserted between images depending on the digital camera in use.

Printing in the specified way may not be possible depending on the specification for the number of images to be printed.

Printing Quality

Use this function to print images at the selected printing quality.

If you select [ Default ] or [ Normal ] , the printer prints at 1200 dpi

×

600 dpi (1 bit); if you select [ Fine ] , the printer prints at 1200 dpi

×

1200 dpi (1 bit).

Color Matching

Use this function to optimize colors when printing images.

If you select [ Default ] or [ OFF ] , the printer prioritizes gradation for color matching, if you select [ ON ] , the printer prioritizes saturation.

Form Printing

Use this function to print images in a predetermined layout format.

148

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

Camera Memo Printing

Use this function to print text data together with an image if it is attached to the image.

149

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

Exiting PictBridge

Follow the procedure below to quit PictBridge mode.

A

Check the control panel of this machine is displaying the "Ready" state.

B

Disconnect the USB cable from the machine.

Do not disconnect the USB cable while data is being sent to the printer. If you do, printing will fail.

150

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

Troubleshooting

Symptom Remedy

PictBridge cannot be used.

When more than one digital camera is connected, the printer does not recognize the second and subsequent digital cameras.

Printing is impossible.

Follow the steps below:

1. Disconnect and then reconnect the

USB cable.

2. Check the Pict-

Bridge configuration is correct.

3. Disconnect the

USB cable, switch off the printer and then switch it on again. Check the printer is ready, and then reconnect the

USB cable.

Only one digital camera can be connected to the printer.

Do not connect more than one digital camera.

You can specify up to 600 images to be printed in one print transaction. To print more images, use more than one print transaction.

151

Direct Printing from a Digital Camera (PictBridge)

Other Reference Information

For further details about printing on this machine, see the following:

152

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Menu Chart

This section explains how to change the default settings of the printer and provides information about the parameters included in each menu.

Sample Print

Appear only when the hard disk is installed.

For details, see

p.107 “Sample Print”

.

Locked Print

Appear only when the hard disk is installed.

For Details, see

p.112 “Locked Print”

.

Hold Print

Appear only when the hard disk is installed.

For Details, see

p.117 “Hold Print” .

Stored Print

Appear only when the hard disk is installed.

For Details, see

p.122 “Stored Print” .

Paper Input

Menu

Bypass Size

Tray Paper Size

Paper Type

Aut. Tray Select

Tray Priority

List/Test Print

Menu

Config.P/Er.Log

Config. Page

Error Log

Menu List

G1307502_1.00

Copyright © 2005

153

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Menu

Color Demo Page

PCL Config.Page

PS Config. Page

PDF Config.Page

Hex Dump

Operations Test

Maintenance

Menu

Color Calibrate

Color Regist.

Image Density

Registration

Plain Paper

Thick Paper

Specisal Paper

Del. All Temp

Del. All Stored

HD Format

4C. Graphic Mode

Fuser Temperat.

Replacmnt Alert

Date/Time

WL.LAN Signal

WL.LAN Defaults

Key Repeat

Erase All Mem.

System

Menu

Prt. Err Report

Auto Continue

Memory Overflow

Copies

Printer Lang.

154

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Menu

Sub Paper Size

Page Size

Edge-Edge Print

Def.Print Lang.

Duplex

Blank Pages

Output Tray

Job Separation

Energy Saver 1

Energy Saver 2

Auto Reset Time

Auto Del. Temp

Auto Del. Stored

Unit of Measure

B&W Page Detect

Spool Printing

Letterhead Mode

Bypass Priority

Tray Switching

RAM Disk

Notify by E-mail

Auto Del. Temp, Auto Del. Stored and [ Spool Printing ] appears when the hard disk is installed.

[ RAM Disk ] will not appear when the hard disk is installed.

Host Interface

Menu

I/O Buffer

I/O Timeout

Network Setup

IEEE 1394 Setup

IEEE 802.11b

155

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

[ IEEE 1394 Setup ] appears when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.

[ IEEE 802.11b

] appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.

PCL Menu

Menu

Orientation

Form Lines

Font Source

Font Number

Point Size

Font Pitch

Symbol Set

Courier Font

Ext. A4 Width

Append CR to LF

Resolution

PS Menu

Menu

Data Format

Resolution

Color Setting

Color Profile

PDF Menu

Menu

PDF: Change PW

PDF Group PW

Resolution

Color Setting

Color Profile

156

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Language

Menu

English

German

French

Italian

Dutch

Swedish

Norwegian

Danish

Spanish

Finnish

Portuguese

Czech

Polish

Hungarian

157

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Paper Input Menu

This section explains about paper settings on the Paper Input menu such as paper sizes and types on each tray.

Changing the paper input menu

Tray locking

Follow the procedure below to lock/unlock trays.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Paper Input ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Aut. Tray Select ], and then press the

{ # Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the tray to unlock, and then press the { # Enter } key.

E

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Off ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ Paper Input ] screen appears.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Tray priority

Follow the procedure below to change the tray priority.

158

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Paper Input ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Tray Priority ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to select a tray you want to use.

E

Press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ Paper Input ] screen appears.

F

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Paper Input menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the Paper Input menu.

Bypass Size

You can specify the paper size for Bypass tray.

For details about the size of paper loaded in the bypass tray, see “Paper and

Other Media Supported by This Printer”, Maintenance Guide.

Tray Paper Size

Paper size for tray 2, 3, 4

When you select sizes that are not indicated on the paper size dial of tray 1, tray 2 or tray 3, you should set the dial to “ p ”, and then select the paper size here.

For details about the size of paper loaded in each tray, see “Paper and Other

Media Supported by This Printer”, Maintenance Guide.

Only the installed trays appear on the display panel.

159

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Paper Type

If you use various types of paper, select the paper type for tray 1, tray 2, tray

3, tray 4 or bypass tray.

For details about types of paper loaded in each tray, see “Paper and Other

Media Supported by This Printer”, Maintenance Guide.

Tray 1, 2, 3, 4

Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead,

Preprinted

Bypass Tray

Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead,

Preprinted, Transparency, Thick Paper

Default : Plain Paper

Only the installed trays appear on the display panel.

Aut. Tray Select

If you select [ Auto Tray Select ] , paper trays can be selected according to the printer driver-specified paper size and type. Default is [ On ] .

Tray Priority

You can set a tray to be checked first when [ Auto Tray Select ] is selected in [ Paper Source ] from the printer driver.

• Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4

Default : Tray 1

Only installed trays appear on the display panel.

It is recommended that you load paper of the size and orientation you use most frequently in the tray selected in [ Tray Priority ] .

160

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

List/Test Print Menu

You can print lists of configurations on printer or the paper printings.

Also, you can check the types and characters of all the printable fonts.

Printing a Configuration Page

Follow the procedure below to print the configuration page.

The configuration page is printed on A4 or Letter (8 1 /

2

x 11) size paper, so load them in the same paper tray.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ List/Test Print ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ Config. Page ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

The configuration page is printed. The test print menu screen returns on completion of printing.

D

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Interpreting the configuration page

System Reference

Printer ID

The serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer is displayed.

161

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Firmware Version

• Firmware

The version number of the printer controller firmware is displayed.

• Engine

The version number of the printer engine firmware is displayed.

• NCS

The version number of the network interface firmware is displayed.

Pages Printed

The total number of pages printed by the printer to date is displayed.

Total Memory

The total amount of SDRAM installed on the printer is displayed.

Controller Option

The items are displayed when the controller options are installed.

Printer Language

The version number of the printer language is displayed.

Options

The options installed are displayed.

Consumption Status

The amount of toner remaining is displayed.

Paper Input

Settings made on the [ Paper Input ] menu are displayed.

For details, see

p.158 “Paper Input Menu” .

Maintenance

Settings made on the [ Maintenance ] menu are displayed.

For details, see

p.165 “Maintenance Menu”

.

System

Settings made on the [ System ] menu are displayed.

For more information, see

p.171 “System Menu” .

Host Interface

Settings made on the [ Host Interface ] menu are displayed.

When DHCP is active on the network, the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address appear in parentheses on the configuration page.

162

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

For details, see

p.179 “Host Interface Menu” .

PCL Menu

Settings made on the [ PCL Menu ] are displayed.

For details, see

p.186 “PCL Menu” .

PS Menu

Settings made on the [ PS Menu ] are displayed.

For details, see

p.189 “PS Menu” .

PDF Menu

Settings made on the [ PDF Menu ] are displayed.

For details, see

p.191 “PDF Menu” .

Interface Information

Interface information is displayed.

List/Test menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the List/Test menu.

Config.P/Er.Log

You can print the configuration page and error log.

Config. Page

You can print the current configuration of the printer.

Error Log

You can print an error report.

Menu List

You can print a menu list showing all available menus.

Color Demo Page

Select this to print the color sample.

PCL Config.Page

You can print the current PCL configuration.

PS Config. Page

You can print an resident PS3 font and the Disk Directory List which shows the hard disk.

163

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

PDF Config.Page

You can print an resident PS3 font and the Disk Directory List which shows the hard disk.

Hex Dump

You can print the data sent by the computer using Hex Dump.

Operations Test

Use this to check the printer and its options for operability, including paper feed and output, as well as 2 Tray Finisher (optional) punching and stapling.

Only settings of installed options are displayed. If a specified function fails, the printer displays a message and stops printing. If the test is successful, the printer prints black frames.

164

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Maintenance Menu

You can set printing conditions such as density and calibration, and printer management such as formatting the hard disk unit.

Changing the maintenance menu

This section explains changing the maintenance menu using examples.

HD Format

Follow the procedure below to format the hard disk unit after initial setup.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ Maintenance ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ HD Format ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Read the HD format confirmation message, and then press the { # Enter } key to start formatting.

The hard disk unit is formatted, and the rebooting message appears.

E

Turn off the printer's power. After a few seconds, turn the power on again.

The hard disk unit is now formatted and ready to use.

165

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

If the [ HD Format ] button is not displayed, the hard disk unit is not properly installed. Reinstall the hard disk unit. For details about the hard disk unit, see Setup Guide. If you cannot install it properly even after attempting reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative.

Displaying the signal strength

Follow the procedure below to check the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) signal on the [ Maintenance ] menu.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ Maintenance ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ WL.LAN Signal ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

Check the display for result.

D

Press the { Escape } key.

The initial screen appears.

If [ WL.LAN Signal ] is not displayed, [ IIEEE 802.11b

] has not been selected for

[ LAN Type ] in [ Network Setup ] on the [ Host Interface ] menu. Select [ IEEE

802.11b

] for [ LAN Type ] , and then check that [ WL.LAN Signal ] is displayed on the [ Maintenance ] menu again.

Signal status can be measured in [ Infrastructure ] under [ Comm. Mode ] of the wireless LAN. If [ Ad hoc ] or [ 802.11 Ad hoc ] is selected in [ Comm. Mode ] , signal status cannot be measured. To measure signal status, select [ Comm.

Mode ] in [ Infrastructure ] under [ IEEE 802.11b

] on the [ Host Interface ] menu.

Every time you press the { # Enter } key, the signal is updated.

166

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

The signal is rated [ Good ] if signal strength is 76%-100%, [ Fair ] if 41%-75%,

[ Poor ] if 21%-40%, and [ Unavailable ] if 0%-20%. If the signal is unstable or unavailable, remove any obstructions or move the printer to a place to receive the signal.

Using wireless devices or microwave sources nearby will affect the signal transmission.

Resetting the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Settings

Follow the procedure below to reset the wireless LAN setting on the [ Maintenance ] menu.

[ Comm. Mode ] , [ Channel ] , [ Trans. Speed ] , [ WEP Setting ] , and [ SSID ] can be selected on the [ Host Interface ] menu.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ Maintenance ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {T} or {U} key to display [ WL.LAN Defaults ], and then press the

{ # Enter } key.

D

Press the { # Enter } key.

The wireless LAN setting is reset.

After about three seconds, the initial screen appears.

Maintenance menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the Maintenance menu.

167

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Color Regist.

Color deviation on printouts may occur as a result of printing on thick paper, moving the machine, or repetitive continuous printing. Use the color deviation compensation function to obtain correct printouts. For details about the color deviation compensation method, see Maintenance Guide.

Color Calibrate

Subtle changes to color gradation may occur for a number of reasons - such as repetitive continuous printing or changing toner(s). Use this function to restore normal color gradation. For details about color gradation adjustment, see Maintenance Guide.

Under normal circumstances, color gradation is unnecessary.

Image Density

You can select the print image density.

• -3 to 3

For details, see “Adjusting the Image Density”, Maintenance Guide.

Registration

You can adjust the starting position of the printing page.

Prt. Test Sheet

You can print the registration sets sheet.

• Tray 3, Tray 4, Duplex.BackSide

Only the installed trays appear on the display panel.

Adjustment

You can select the start position for printing on a page.

• Vert.: Tray 3, Vert.: Tray 4, Vert.:Dup.Back

Only the installed trays appear on the display panel.

Plain Paper

Specify a type of plain paper for each of the following trays:

Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, Bypass Tray

• Thin

• Normal

Default: Normal

168

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Thick Paper

Set the thick paper configuration.

Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3, Thick Paper 4

Only the bypass tray can accept thick paper.

For details, see “Type of Paper and Other Media”, Maintenance Guide.

Special Paper

Specify a type of special paper for each of the following trays:

Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, Bypass Tray

For information about the types of ordinary paper, see the Maintenance

Guide.

Special Paper1, Special Paper2, Special Paper3, Special Paper4

For details, see “Type of Paper and Other Media”, Maintenance Guide.

Del. All Temp

This appears on the menu only when the hard disk is installed. Use this function to delete document data for sample printing or confidential document printing all at once.

Del. All Stored

This appears on the menu only when the hard disk is installed. Use this function to delete saved document data all at once.

HD Format

Appears when the hard disk is installed. If the format is necessary, use

p.165

“HD Format” .

WL.LAN Signal

You can check the signal strength when using wireless LAN.

For details about displaying the signal strength, see

p.166 “Displaying the signal strength” .

4C.Graphic Mode

Use this menu item to select a quantity of overlap between the colors CMYK when printing. If characters or ruled lines blur, selecting “Text Priority” may improve the situation. In general, select “Photo Priority”.

• Text Priority

• Photo Priority

Default: Photo Priority

Fuser Temperat.

Use this menu item to select a temperature at which the fuser will be fixed to paper being printed.

In general, select “600dpi Norm. Ppr”.

169

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

• 600dpi Thin Ppr

• 600dpi Norm. Ppr

• 1200dpi

Default: 600dpi Thin Ppr

Replacmnt Alert

Use this function to specify when to warn the user about replacing supplies.

• Notify Sooner

• Normal

• Notify Later

Default: Normal

Date/Time

Use this to set the date and time.

WL.LAN Signal

You can check the signal strength when using wireless LAN. The menu appears when the 802.11b interface unit is installed.

WL.LAN Defaults

Reset the wireless LAN to default. The menu appears when the 802.11b interface unit is installed.

Key Repeat

The default setting [ On ] enables the user to scroll through menu items and settings by holding the key down; the [ Off ] setting requires the user to press the key for each Cursor/Scroll movement.

Erase All Mem.

Use this menu item to erase all data stored in the hard disk drive and and

RAM. Erasing all data takes some time, but use this function to prevent information leakage when disposing the machine.

170

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

System Menu

You can set basic functions required to use the printer. The printer can be used on factory default, but the configuration can be changed depending on the condition of the user. The changed condition holds even if the printer is turned off.

Changing the system menu

Follow the procedure below to change the settings for Energy Saver Timer.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press {U} or {T} key to display [ System ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press {U} or {T} key to display [ Energy Saver 2 ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ E. Saver2 Timer ], and then enter { # Enter } Key

E

Press {U} or {T} key to select the lead time needed to switch to the Energy Saver mode.

F

Press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ Energy Saver 2 ] screen appears.

G

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

System menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the System menu.

171

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Prt. Err Report

You can select [ On ] or [ Off ] to have an error report printed when a printer error or memory error occurs.

• Off

• On

Default: Off

Auto Continue

You can make the Auto Continue setting. When set to on, printing continues after a system error occurs.

• Off

• Immediate

• 1 minute

• 5 minutes

• 10 minutes

• 15 minutes

Default: Off

When set to on and certain errors occur, the current job may be canceled, and the printer automatically perform the next queued job.

Memory Overflow

You can specify whether or not to print a memory overflow error report.

• Do not print

• Error Info.

Default: Do not print

Copies

You can specify the number of pages to print.

This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print is specified by command or the printer driver.

• 1-999

Printer Lang.

You can specify the printer language.

• Auto Detect

• PCL

• PS

• PDF

172

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Default: Auto Detect

Sub Paper Size

You can select [ Off ] or [ Auto ] to enable the Sub Paper Size function. When you select [ Auto ] , the printer switches to the available paper (A4 or Letter) if the currently specified paper is not loaded. When you select [ Off ] , the printer uses any size paper in the current specified paper tray.

• Off

• Auto

Default: Off

Page Size

You can specify the default paper size.

12

9

1

×

18, 11

/

2

×

4

1

×

/

8

, 7

17, 8

1

/

2

×

3

1

×

220), Custom Size.

/

2

×

14, 8 1 /

2

×

11, 5 1 /

2

×

8 1 /

2

, 7 1 /

4

×

10 1 /

2

, 8

×

13, 8 1 /

2

×

13, 8

1

/

4

×

13, A3 (297

×

420), B4 JIS (257

×

364), A4 (210

×

297), B5 JIS

(182

×

257), A5 (148

×

210), A6 (105

×

148), 8K (267

×

390), 16K (195

×

267),

7

/

8

, C6 Env (229

×

162), C6 Env (114

×

162), DL Env (110

Default:

• Metric version: A4

• Inch version: 8 1 /

2

×

11

The initial paper size is applied when the paper size is not specified in the print data.

JIS stands for “Japanese Industrial Standard”.

Edge-Edge Print

You can print on the complete area of a sheet leaving no border on any edge.

• Off

• On

Default: Off

Def.Print Lang.

You can specify the initial printer language if the machine cannot detect the printer language.

• PCL

• PS

• PDF

173

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Default: PCL

Duplex

You can specify whether or not to print on both sides of a sheet.

• Off

• Short Edge Bind

• Long Edge Bind

Default: Off

This menu appears only when the optional duplex unit is installed.

Blank Pages

You can specify whether or not to print blank pages.

• Print

• Do not print

Default: Print

Output Tray

Specify the output tray that is selected by priority if the output tray is not explicitly specified.

Job Separation

Specify whether to perform shift for each job on the output tray (2 Tray Finisher) equipped with the shift function.

• On

• Off

Default: Off

Energy Saver 1

You can specify whether or not to switch Energy Saver 1.

• On

• Off

Default: Off

When the printer switches to the Energy Saver 1 mode, the machine changes to Energy Saver 1 on completion of printing. It is not as energy saving as Energy Saver 2, but returns to print in 30 seconds. Also, there will be no change to the display panel.

174

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Energy Saver 2

You can specify how many minutes for the energy saver mode.

E. Saver2 On/Off

You can specify whether or not to switch E. Saver2.

• On

• Off

Default: On

When the printer switches to the Energy Saver 2 mode, the Power indicator goes off, while the online indicator stays lit.

E. Saver2 Timer

You can select the lead time needed to switch to the Energy Saver 2 mode.

The Energy Saver 2 mode reduces electric power consumption.

• 5 minutes

• 15 minutes

• 30 minutes

• 45 minutes

• 60 minutes

Default: 60 minutes

When the printer switches to the Energy Saver 2 mode, the Power indicator goes off, while the Online indicator stays lit and [ Energy Saver 2

Mode ] appears.

Auto Reset Time

Specify whether to revert to the initial configuration at certain interval. This also specifies the interval to reset the configuration.

Auto Reset

• On

• Off

Default: On

Reset Time

• 10 to 999 sec by 1 sec.

Default: 60 sec

175

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Auto Del. Temp

Specify whether to automatically delete temporarily saved documents (Sample Print, Locked Print and Hold Print data), such as sample print documents or confidential documents. Also specify the time period to elapse before deletion.

Auto Delete

Select whether to delete the document automatically.

• On

• Off

Default: Off

Hours to Delete

Specify how much time will elapse before the document is automatically deleted.

Default: 8 hours

These items are only displayed when the hard disk drive is installed.

Auto Del. Stored

Specify whether to automatically delete saved documents (Stored Print data).

Also specify the elapse time in days before deletion.

Auto Delete

Select whether to delete the document automatically.

• On

• Off

Default: Off

Days to Delete

Specify the number of days to elapse before the document is automatically deleted.

Default: 3 days

These items are only displayed when the optional hard disk drive is installed.

Unit of Measure

You can specify the unit of measurement in “mm” or “inch” for the custom paper size.

• mm

176

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

• inch

Default value is destination dependant.

B&W Page Delete

Specify whether to recognize black-and-white images. Use the black-andwhite recognition function to print all monochrome pages in monochrome mode even if color printing is specified.

• On

• Off

Default: On

Spool Printing

You can select whether all of the print data is spooled to the hard disk drive before printing.

• Off

• On

Default: Off

Spooling stores a sent print job temporarily in the printer, and then prints it.

This menu appears only when the hard disk is installed.

Letterhead Mode

You can select the letterhead printing mode.

• Off

• Auto Detect

• On (Always)

Default: Off

Bypass Priority

When the different paper size or type is specified from the driver, you can specify which setting is given priority to, machine setting or command.

• Machine

• Driver/Command

Default: Driver/Command

177

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Tray Switching

Specify the printer to change printing to the suitable tray, when printer driver specifies different paper size or type from the current tray.

• Off

• On

Default: Off

RAM Disk

If the hard disk is not installed for PDF Direct Print, select a value of 2 MB or higher.

This menu appears only when the hard disk is not installed.

• 0 MB

• 2 MB

• 4 MB

• 8 MB

• 16 MB

Default: 4 MB

When the amount of SDRAM is small and RAM Disk is set to 16 MB, printing may not be possible depending on the print job and duplex printing may be canceled. If this happens, increase the amount of SDRAM, or set RAM

Disk to 8 MB or less.

For details about the optional SDRAM module, see Setup Guide.

Notify by E-mail

You can specify whether or not to send an error message to a preset e-mail address when an error occurs in the printer.

• Off

• On

After changing the setting, turn off the power of the printer briefly, and then turn it on again.

Default: On

For information, see Web Image Monitor Help.

178

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Host Interface Menu

You can set configurations about network connections and communication when using parallel connection between the printer and the computer. The changed configuration holds even if the printer is turned off.

Changing the Host Interface menu

Follow the procedure below to change the I/O Timeout

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Host Interface ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ I/O Buffer ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to display the [ 256KB ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ Host Interface ] menu appears.

E

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Host Interface menu parameters

This section explains parameters that can be set on the Host Interface menu.

I/O Buffer

You can select the size of I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change this setting.

• 128 KB

179

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

• 256 KB

Default: 128 KB

I/O Timeout

You can set how many seconds the printer should wait before ending a print job. If printing operation is frequently interrupted by data from other ports, you can increase the timeout period.

• 10 seconds

• 15 seconds

• 20 seconds

• 25 seconds

• 60 seconds

Default: 15 seconds

Network Setup

You can make network-related settings.

For details, see “Configuration”, Setup Guide.

DHCP 1394

You can select [ On ] or [ Off ] to use DHCP with TCP/IP.

• On

• Off

Default: On

IP Address

You can specify the IP address.

When DHCP is set to on, the IP address cannot be changed. To change it, set DHCP to off. Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.

Default: 011.022.033.044

Subnet Mask

You can specify the subnet mask.

180

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

When DHCP is set to on, the subnet mask cannot be changed. To change it, set DHCP to off. Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.

Default: 000.000.000.000

Gateway Address

You can specify the gateway address.

When DHCP is set to on, the gateway address cannot be changed. To change it, set DHCP to off. Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.

Default: 000.000.000.000

Frame Type (NW)

You can select the frame type for NetWare.

• Auto Select

• Ethernet ll

• Ethernet 802.2

• Ethernet 802.3

• Ethernet SNAP

Default: Auto Select

Active Protocol

You can select the active protocol.

• TCP/IP

• NetWare

• SMB

• AppleTalk

Default: All Active

Ethernet Speed

You can select the network speed to operate the printer.

• Auto Select

• 10Mbps Half D.

• 10Mbps Full D.

181

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

• 100Mbps Half D.

• 100Mbps Full D.

Default: Auto Select

LAN Type

You can select Ethernet or IEEE 802.11b for LAN Type.

This menu appears only when the optional 802.11 interface unit is installed.

• Ethernet

• IEEE 802.11b

Default: Ethernet

IEEE 1394 Setup

You can make settings for IEEE 1394. This menu appears only when the optional IEEE 1394 board is installed.

For details about IEEE 1394 Setup, see Setup Guide.

DHCP 1394

You can select [ On ] or [ Off ] to use TCP/IP with DHCP.

• On

• Off

Default: On

IP Address1394

You can specify the IP address for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).

Default: 0.0.0.0

When using both Ethernet and IP over 1394 simultaneously, do not specify the IP address used for Ethernet.

Subnet Mask1394

You can specify the subnet mask for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).

Default: 0.0.0.0

When using both Ethernet and IP over 1394 simultaneously, do not specify the subnet mask used for Ethernet.

182

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

IP over 1394

You can specify whether or not to activate IP over 1394.

• Active

• Not Active

Default: Active

SCSI print

You can specify whether or not to activate SCSI print.

• Active

• Not Active

Default: Active

Bidi-SCSI print

You can specify whether or not to activate bidirectional communication for

SCSI print.

• On

• Off

Default: On

IEEE 802.11b

You can make settings for wireless LAN. This menu appears only when the optional 802.11b interface unit is installed.

Comm. Mode

You can select the transmission mode for IEEE 802.11b.

• 802.11 Ad hoc

• Infrastructure

• Ad hoc

Default: 802.11 Ad hoc

Comm. Mode can also be set using a Web Image Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.

Channel

You can select channels: 1-11 (inch version)/1-13 (metric version).

Default: 11 (inch version)/13 (metric version)

183

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Trans. Speed

You can select the transmission speed for IEEE 802.11b.

• Auto

• 11 Mbps

• 5.5 Mbps

• 2 Mbps

• 1 Mbps

Default: Auto

SSID

You can set an SSID in the infrastructure mode and the 802.11 Ad hoc mode.

Select [ View ] to check the SSID. Select [ Enter ID ] to set SSID.

• View

• Enter ID

Select [ ?

] to enter [ / ] for the SSID. Also, [ ¥ ] appears when printing the configuration page, read it as [ / ] .

Default: blank (ASSID)

Characters used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).

An SSID is set automatically to the nearest access point if no SSID has been set.

If no SSID has been set for the 802.11 ad hoc mode, an SSID is set automatically and the same SSID is used for the 802.11 ad hoc mode and the infrastructure mode.

If blank is specified in SSID for 802.11b adhoc mode or adhoc mode,

“ASSID” appears.

An SSID can also be set using Web Image Monitor. For details, see

Web Image Monitor Help.

WEP Setting

You can specify whether or not to activate WEP settings.

• Active

• Not Active

Default: Not Active

The WEP key can be entered using a hexadecimal number or an ASCII character sequence.

184

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

When using 64 bit WEP, up to 10 hexadecimal or 5 ASCII characters can be entered. When using 128 bit WEP, up to 26 hexadecimal or 13

ASCII characters can be entered.

The WEP key can also be set using Web Image Monitor. For details, see

Web Image Monitor Help.

185

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

PCL Menu

You can set conditions when using PCL for printing.

Changing the PCL menu

Follow the procedure below to change the setting for Orientation.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ PCL Menu ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Orientation ] screen, and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to select the orientation, and then press the { #

Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ PCL Menu ] screen appears.

E

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

PCL Menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the PCL menu.

Orientation

You can select the page orientation.

• Portrait

• Landscape

186

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Default: Portrait

Form Lines

You can specify the number of lines per page between 5 and 128.

Default:

• Metric version: 64

• Inch version: 60

Font Source

You can set the location of the default font.

• Resident

• RAM

• HDD

• SD

Default: Resident

When you select [ RAM ] , you can select only fonts downloaded to the printer

RAM.

When you select [ HDD ] , you can select only fonts downloaded to the hard disk.

Font Number

You can specify the ID of the default font you want to use.

• 0 to 63 (Internal)

• 1 to 63 (Download)

Point Size

You can specify the point size you want to use for the default font between 4 and 999.75 in 0.25 increments.

Default: 12.00 points

This setting is effective only for a variable-space font.

Font Pitch

You can specify the number of characters per inch you want to use for the default font between 0.44 and 99.99 in 0.01 increments.

Default: 10.00 pitch

This setting is effective only for fixed-space fonts.

187

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Symbol Set

You can specify the character set for the default font. Available sets are as follows:

Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8-

TK, Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ,

Math-8, PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO

17, ISO 21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0

Default: PC-8

Courier Font

You can select a courier-type font.

• Regular

• Dark

Default: Regular

Ext. A4 Width

You can extend the width of the printable area of A4 sheets reducing side margin width.

• Off

• On

Default: Off

Append CR to LF

You can specify whether or not to append a CR code to each LF code to print text data clearly.

• Off

• On

Default: Off

Resolution

You can specify the print resolution in dots per inch.

• 300 dpi

• 600 dpi

Default: 600 dpi

188

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

PS Menu

You can set conditions when using Postscript for printing.

Changing the PS menu

Follow the procedure below to change the setting for date format.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ PS Menu ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Data Format ], and then press the { #

Enter } key.

D

Press the {U} or {T} key to select [ TBCP ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ PS Menu ] screen appears.

E

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

PS Menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the Postscript menu.

Data Format

You can select the data format.

• Binary Data

• TBCP

This setting is not effective when using a parallel or EtherTalk connection.

189

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

When you use a parallel or USB connection, the print job is canceled if binary data is sent from the printer driver.

When you use an Ethernet connection, the print job is canceled if:

• The printer driver data format is TBCP and the data format selected using the control panel is Binary Data.

• The printer driver data format is binary and the data format selected using the control panel is TBCP.

Default: TBCP

Resolution

You can select the resolution.

• 600dpi Fast

• 600dpi Std.

• 1200dpi

Default: 600dpi Fast

Color Setting

You can select the RGB Color adjustment quality.

• None

• Fine

• Super Fine

Default: Super Fine

Color Profile

You can select the color profile.

• Auto

• Solid Color

• Presentation

• Photographic

• User Setting

Default: Auto

190

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

PDF Menu

You can set conditions when using PDF printing.

Changing the PDF menu

Follow the procedure below to change the resolution setting.

A

Press { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press {U} or {T} key to display [ PDF Menu ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press {U} or {T} key to display [ Resolution ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

D

Press {U} or {T} key to select the resolution, and then press the { # Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ PDF Menu ] screen appears.

E

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

PDF Menu parameters

This section explains about parameters that can be set on the PDF menu.

PDF: Change PW

You can specify the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.

The password can be set using Web Image Monitor, but must be sent through the network. For increased security, use this menu on the control panel to set the password directly.

191

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Default: no password set

PDF Group PW

You can set a group password specified using DeskTopBinder Lite.

• Current PW

The password can be set using Web Image Monitor, but must be sent through the network. For increased security, use this menu on the control panel to set the password directly.

Default: no password set

Resolution

You can select the resolution for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.

• 600dpi Fast

• 600dpi Std.

• 1200dpi

Default: 600dpi Fast

Color Setting

You can select the RGB Color adjustment quality.

• None

• Fine

• Super Fine

Default: Super Fine

Color Profile

You can select the color profile.

• Auto

• Solid Color

• Presentation

• Photographic

• User Setting

Default: Auto

192

Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel

Language Menu

You can set language displayed on the menu.

Changing the language menu

Follow the procedure below to change the language.

A

Press the { Menu } key.

The [ Menu ] screen appears.

B

Press the {U} or {T} key to display [ Language ], and then press the { # Enter } key.

C

Press the {U} or {T} key to select the language, and then press the { #

Enter } key.

Wait for two seconds. The [ Menu ] screen appears.

D

Press the { Online } key.

The initial screen appears.

Language menu parameters

You can select the language you use. Available languages are as follows:

English, German, French, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Spanish,

Finnish, Portuguese, Czech, Polish, and Hungarian.

Default: English

193

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Using Web Image Monitor

Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the printer status and change settings.

Available operations

The following operations can be remotely performed using Web Image Monitor from a client computer.

• Displaying printer status or settings

• Checking the print job status or history

• Interrupting currently printing jobs

• Resetting the printer

• Managing the Address Book

• Making printer settings

• Making e-mail notification settings

• Making network protocol settings

• Making security settings

Configuring the printer

To perform the operations from Web Image Monitor, TCP/IP is required. After the printer is configured to use TCP/IP, operations from Web Image Monitor become available.

Recommended Web browser

• Windows:

Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher

Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher

• Mac OS 8.1 or higher:

Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher

Safari 1.0 or higher

To use Netscape Navigator with Secured Sockets Layer (SSL: an encryption protocol), use Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher.

If the previous versions of the Web browser above are used or JavaScript and cookies are not enabled with the Web browser used, display and operation problems may occur.

If you are using a proxy server, change the Web browser settings. Contact your network administrator for information about the settings.

The previous page may not appear even after the back button of a Web browser is clicked. If this happens, click the refresh button of a Web browser.

Updating the printer information is not automatically performed. Click [ Refresh ] in the display area to update the printer information.

G1307502_1.00

Copyright © 2005

194

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Displaying Top Page

This section explains the Top Page and how to display Web Image Monitor.

A

Start your Web browser.

B

Enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the address bar of a Web browser.

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

If the printer's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server, you can enter it. For details, see

p.319 “Using DHCP”

.

When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentification is issued , enter “https://(printer's address)/“.

Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas:

1.

Header area

The link to help and dialog box for keyword search appears.

2.

Menu area

The dialog box for switching to the user mode and administrator mode appears, and each mode's menu will be displayed.

If you select menu, it's content will be shown on the work area, or the sub area.

3.

Display area

Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area.

Printer information in the display area is not automatically updated. Click [ Refresh ] at the upper right in the display area to update the printer information. Click the Web browser's [ Refresh ] button to refresh the entire browser screen.

Printer status, network interface board names, and comments are displayed.

4.

Help

Use Help to view or download Help file contents.

195

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

About Menu and Mode

There are two modes available with Web Image Monitor: user mode and administrator mode.

Displayed items may differ depending on the printers.

About User Mode

In the user mode, printer status, settings, and print job status can be viewed, but the printer settings cannot be changed.

1.

Status

Printer status, including the amount of remaining paper in paper trays and the amount of remaining toner, is displayed.

2.

Job

Allows you to display list of Spooled Print Job, Job History, Error Log, Locked Print and Sample Print jobs. This also perform or delete Locked Print and Sample Print jobs.

3.

Configuration

Display current printer and network settings, and download help files.

Administrator Mode

In the administrator mode, you can configure various printer settings.

1.

Status

Printer status, including the amount of remaining paper in paper trays and the amount of remaining toner, is displayed.

196

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

2.

Job

Allows you to display list of Spooled Print Job, Job History, Error Log, Sample Print and Locked Print. This also allows you to delete Spooled Print Job, Locked Print and

Sample Print Jobs.

3.

Address Book

User information can be registered, displayed, changed, and deleted.

4.

Configuration

Make system settings for the printer, interface settings, and security.

5.

Reset Printer Job

Click to reset current print jobs and print jobs in queue. This button is located on Top

Page.

6.

Reset Device

Click to reset the printer. If a print job is being processed, the printer will be reset after the print job is completed. This button is located on Top Page.

Access in the Administrator Mode

Follow the procedure below to access Web Image Monitor in the administrator mode.

A

On Top Page, click [ Login ].

The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

B

Enter your user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

You can select the color profile.

Displaying Web Image Monitor Help

When using Help for the first time, clicking either [ Help ] in the header area or the icon marked “?” in the display area makes the following screen appear, in which you can view Help in two different ways, as shown below:

Viewing Help on our Web site

Downloading Help to your computer

Downloading and Checking Help

You can download Help to your computer. As the Help URL, you can specify the path to the local file to view the Help without connecting to the Internet.

By clicking [ Help ] in the header area, the contents of Help appear.

By clicking “?”, the Help icon in the display area, Help for the setting items in the display area appears.

197

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Downloading Help

A

In the [ OS ] list, select the operating system.

B

In the [ Language ] list, select the language.

C

Click [ Download ].

D

Download Help by following the instructions on the screen.

E

Store the downloaded compressed file in a location, and then decompress the file.

To view the downloaded Web Image Monitor Help, set the path to the location of the decompressed file.

Linking the URL of the Help File to the

[

Help

]

Button.

You can link the URL of the help file on a computer or Web server to the [ Help ] button.

A

Log on to Web Image Monitor in the administrator mode.

B

In the menu area, click [ Configuration ].

C

Click [ Webpage ].

D

In the [ Help URL ] box, enter the URL of the help file.

If you saved the help file to “C:\HELP\EN”, enter “file://C:/HELP/”. For example, if you saved the file to a Web server, and the URL of the index file is “http:// a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/index.html”, enter “http://a.b.c.d/HELP/”.

E

Click [ Apply ].

198

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can monitor the network printers. Also, you can change the configuration of the network interface board using

TCP/IP or IPX/SPX.

Protocol stack provided with Operating System

• Windows 95/98/Me

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

NetWare

NetWare Client32 for Windows 95

IntraNetWare Client for Windows 95

Novell Client for Windows 95/98/Me

• Windows 2000

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

NetWare

Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP

• Windows Server 2003

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

• Windows XP

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP

• Windows NT 4.0

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

Client Service for NetWare

NetWare Client32 for Windows NT

IntraNetWare Client for Windows NT

Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP

Available operations

The following functions are available:

• Printer Information function

• Display the network settings and detailed information of the printer.

• Display the number of pages printed under each user code.

• Display the status of print jobs sent from computers.

• Change the printer network settings.

• Device Settings function

199

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• Lock some of the setting items on the control panel so that they cannot be changed using the control panel.

• Select type of paper loaded in the paper trays.

• Energy Saver function

• Enable or disable the Energy Saver mode.

• System Status function

• Display the information such as when paper is depleted during printing on a computer .

• Groups function

• Monitor multiple printers at the same time. When there are multiple printers to manage, you can create groups and classify the printers to facilitate management.

• You can customize printer status according to groups, and send status notification e-mail to a computer.

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Follow the procedure below to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this case, launch “Setup.exe” located on the CD-ROM root directory.

C

Select an interface language, and then click [ OK ].

The default interface language is English.

D

Click [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin ] installation, and then click [ Next ].

E

The software license agreement appears in the [ License Agreement ] dialog box.

After reading through its contents, click [ I accept the agreement ] if you agree, and then click [ Next > ] .

F

Follow the instructions on the screen.

A message appears when the installation is complete.

G

Click [ OK ].

200

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

If you are required to restart the computer after installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, restart the computer and continue the configuration.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin supports the following languages: Czech,

Danish, German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Hungarian, Dutch, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Finnish, Swedish, Chinese Simple and Chinese Traditional.

Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration

Follow the procedure below to change the network interface board configuration using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ]. A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

In the list, select a printer whose configuration you want to change.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, click [ NIB Setup Tool ].

A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the user name and password for the Web Image Monitor administrator appears.

To use the default account, enter “admin” as the user name, and leave the password blank.

NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the instruction on the screen.

E

Enter required setting items.

Configure settings using Web Image Monitor. For details, see p.194 “Using

Web Image Monitor” .

F

Quit Web Image Monitor.

G

Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

Locking the Menus on the Printer's Control Panel

Follow the procedure below to lock the menus on the printer's control panel.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

201

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

Select a printer.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, point to [ Device Settings ], and then click [ Lock Operation

Panel Menu ].

A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the

Web Image Monitor administrator appears.

E

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

For details about the password, consult your network administrator.

The [ System ] page of Web Image Monitor appears.

F

Select [ Level 1 ] or [ Level 2 ] in the [ Protect Printer Operation Panel ] list.

G

Click [ Apply ].

H

Quit Web Image Monitor.

For details about setting items, see Help in the [ General Settings ] on [ Configuration ] page.

Changing the Paper Type

Follow the procedure below to change the paper type.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

In the list, select a printer whose configuration you want to change.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, point to [ Device Settings ], and then click [ Select Paper

Type ].

A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the

Web Image Monitor administrator appears.

202

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

E

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

For details about the password, consult your network administrator.

The [ Paper ] page appears.

F

Select a paper type in the [ Paper Type ] list for each tray.

G

Click [ Apply ].

H

Quit Web Image Monitor.

For details about setting items, see Help in the [ General Settings ] on [ Configuration ] page.

Managing User Information

Follow the procedure below to manage the user's information using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

Prints jobs can be managed and functions restricted by user codes.

Starting User Management Tool

Follow the procedure below to start User Management Tool.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

In the list, select a printer you want to manage.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, click [ User Management Tool ].

The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

E

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

For details about the password, consult your network administrator.

User Management Tool starts.

For details about User Management Tool, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

203

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Displaying the Number of Sheets Printed

Follow the procedure below to display the number of sheets printed under each user code.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

Click the [ User Page Count ] tab of User Management Tool.

The number of pages printed under each user code appears.

C

Click [ Finish ] on the [ File ] menu to quit User Management Tool.

Exporting the information about the number of pages printed

Follow the procedure below to export the information of the number of pages printed under each user code as a “.csv” file.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

Click the [ User Page Count ] tab of User Management Tool.

C

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Export User Statistics List ].

D

Specify the save location and file name, and then click [ Save ].

E

Click [ Finish ] on the [ File ] menu to quit User Management Tool.

Resetting the number of pages printed to 0.

Follow the procedure below to reset the number of pages printed under each user code to 0.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin .

B

Click the [ User Page Count ] tab of User Management Tool.

C

Click the user whose information you want to reset.

D

On the [ Edit ] menu, click [ Reset User Counters ].

E

Select the check box of the items you want to reset, and then click [ OK ].

A confirmation message appears.

F

Click [ Yes ].

The number of pages printed is reset to 0.

G

On the [ Edit ] menu, click [ Apply Settings ].

Changes are applied to information on the [ User Page Count ] tab.

H

Click [ Finish ] on the [ File ] menu to quit User Management Tool.

204

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Restricting Functions

Follow the procedure below to restrict use of individual functions.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Edit ] menu of User Management Tool, click [ Restrict Access To Device ].

C

Select the check box of the functions you want to restrict.

D

Click [ OK ].

A confirmation message appears.

E

Click [ Yes ].

The settings are applied.

Setting Applicable Functions to New Users

Follow the procedure below to add new users and set functions applicable to them.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

Click the [ Access Control List: ] tab of User Management Tool.

C

On the [ Edit ] menu, click [ Add New User ].

D

Enter the user code and user name.

E

Select the check box of the functions applicable to the new user.

If the check boxes are unavailable, there is no restriction to use that function. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

F

Click [ OK ].

The new user is added.

G

On the [ Edit ] menu, click [ Apply Settings ].

The settings are applied.

H

Click [ Finish ] on the [ File ] menu to quit User Management Tool.

For details about setting restrictions, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Help.

205

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Configuring the Energy Saver Mode

Follow the procedure below to configure Energy Saver mode.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

Select the printer whose settings you want to make.

To make settings for all printers in the selected group, select no printer.

D

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Energy Save Mode ], point to [ Set Individually ] to make the settings for only the selected printer or point to [ Set By Group ] to make the settings for all printers in the selected group, and then click

[ On ] or [ Off ].

E

Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

For details about the setting value for Energy Saver mode, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

Setting a Password

Follow the procedure below to set a password.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

C

In the list, select a printer whose configuration you want to change.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, click [ NIB Setup Tool ].

A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the

Web Image Monitor administrator appears.

NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the instructions on the screen.

E

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

For details about the password, consult your network administrator.

206

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

F

Click [ Configuration ].

G

Click [ Device Settings ].

H

Click [ Program/Change Administrator ].

I

Click [ Change ].

J

On the [ New Password ], enter a password.

Enter the same password in [ Confirm Password ] .

K

Click [ OK ].

L

Quit Web Image Monitor.

M

Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

Checking the Printer Status

Follow the procedure below to check printer status.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ].

The status of printers is indicated by icons in the list.

For details about status icons, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

C

To obtain status details, click the printer in the list, and then click [ Open ] on the [ Device ] menu.

The printer status appears in the dialog box.

D

Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

For details about items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.

Changing Names and Comments

Follow the procedure below to change the names and comments of the printer.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

207

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

B

On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Device ], and then click [ TCP/IP ],

[ IPX/SPX ] or [ TCP/IP(SNMPv3) ]. A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.

Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.

C

Select a printer in the list.

D

On the [ Tools ] menu, click [ NIB Setup Tool ].

A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the

Web Image Monitor administrator appears.

NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the instructions on the screen.

E

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

For details about the password, consult your network administrator.

F

Click [ Configuration ].

G

Click [ Device Settings ].

H

On the [ System ] page, enter the device name in the [ Device Name ] box and a comment in the [ Comment ] box, and click [ Apply ].

• In the [ Device Name ] box, enter a device name on the machine using up to

31 characters.

• In the [ Comment ] box, enter a comment on the printer using up to 31 characters.

I

Click [ OK ].

J

Quit Web Image Monitor.

K

Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

208

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

To view the status of printers using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, configure

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client beforehand.

Monitoring Printers

Follow the procedure below to monitor the printer using SmartDeviceMonitor for

Client.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon appears in the task tray.

B

Right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, and check that the printer appears on the pop-up menu.

C

Click [ Options...

] on the pop-up menu if the printer does not appear on the pop-up menu.

The [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client - Options ] dialog box appears.

D

Click the printer you want to monitor, and then select the [ To Be Monitored ] check box in the [ Monitoring Information Settings ] area.

To display the printer status in the task tray using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, select the [ Displayed on Task Bar ] check box.

For details about status icons, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

E

Click [ OK ].

The dialog box closes and the configured printer is monitored.

Checking the Printer Status

Follow the procedure below to check printer status using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

A

Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

B

For status details, right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, and then click the printer.

The printer status appears in the dialog box.

For details about items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

209

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

When using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, note the following:

• The network printer can only receive one print job from SmartDeviceMonitor for Client at a time. While the network printer is printing, another user cannot access it until the job is finished. In this case, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client tries to access the network printer until the retry interval expires.

• If SmartDeviceMonitor for Client cannot access the network printer and times out, it will stop sending the print job. In this case, you should cancel the paused status from the print queue window. SmartDeviceMonitor for Client will resume access to the network printer. You can delete the print job from the print queue window, but canceling a print job printed by the network printer might cause the next job sent from another user to be incorrectly printed.

• If a print job sent from SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is interrupted and the network printer cancels the job because something went wrong, send the print job again.

• Print jobs sent from another computer do not appear in the print queue window, regardless of protocol.

• If various users send print jobs using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client to network printers, the printing order might not be the same as that in which the jobs were sent.

• An IP address cannot be used for the IPP port name because the IP address is used for the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port name.

• When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentification is issued, enter “https://(printer's address)/”. Internet Explorer must be installed on your computer. Use the highest version. Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is recommended.

• If the [ Security Alert ] dialog box appears when accessing the printer using IPP to create or configure an IPP port, or when printing, install the certificate. To select the certificate store location when using Certificate Import Wizard, click

[ Place all certificates in the following store ] , and then click [ Local Computer ] under

[ Trusted Root Certification Authorities ] .

210

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Printer Status Notification by E-Mail

Whenever a paper tray becomes empty or paper is jammed, an e-mail alert is issued to the registered addresses to notify the printer status.

For this notification, you can make the e-mail notification settings.

Notification timing and e-mail content can be set.

You can be notified of the following events:

• Service call.

• Toner cartridge is empty.

• Toner cartridge is nearly empty.

• Photoconductor unit needs replacing.

• Photoconductor unit will need replacing soon.

• Waste toner bottle is full.

• Waste toner bottle is nearly full.

• Stapler has no staples.

• Fusing unit needs replacing.

• Fusing unit will need replacing soon.

• Maintenance kit needs replacing.

• Paper has jammed.

• Open door is detected.

• Paper tray is empty.

• Paper tray error.

• Output paper tray is full.

• Unit connection error.

• Duplex unit error.

• Hard disk drive is full.

• Development Unit needs replacing.

• Development Unit will need replacing soon.

• Transfer Unit needs replacing.

A

Set [ Notify by E-mail ] under the [ System ] menu to [ On ] using the control panel.

The default is [ On ] .

For details, see

p.171 “System Menu” .

B

Open a Web browser, and then enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the address bar.

211

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentification is issued , enter “https://(printer's address)/”.

C

Click [ Login ] on Top Page of Web Image Monitor.

The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

D

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

For details about the password, consult your network administrator.

E

In the menu area, click [ Configuration ].

F

Click [ Device Settings ], and then click [ E-mail ].

G

Make the following settings:

• Items in the Reception column: Make the necessary settings for sending and receiving e-mail.

• Items in the SMTP column: Configure the SMTP server. Check your mailing environment, and then specify the necessary items. You can also perform mail authentication for the SMTP server.

See

p.213 “SMTP Authentication”

.

• Items in the POP before SMTP column: Items in the POP before SMTP column: Configure the POP server. Check your mailing environment, and then specify the necessary items. You can also perform mail authentication for the POP server.

See

p.214 “POP before SMTP Authentication” .

• Items in the POP3/IMAP4 column: Items in the POP3/IMAP4 column: Configure the POP3 or IMAP4 server. Check your mailing environment, and then specify the necessary items.

• Items in the E-mail Reception Port column: Items in the E-Mail Reception

Port column: Configure the port to be used for access to the mail server.

• Items in the E-mail Notification column: Items in the E-Mail Notification Account column: Specify these items to use on-demand e-mail notification.

H

Click [ Apply ].

Auto E-mail Notification

A

In the menu area, click [ Auto E-mail Notification ].

The dialog box for making notification settings appears.

B

Make the following settings:

• Notification Message: You can set this according to your needs, for example, the machine's location, service representative contact information.

212

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• Items in the Groups to Notify column: E-mail notification addresses can be grouped as required.

• Items in the Select Groups/Items to Notify column: Select groups for each notification type, such as machine status and error.

To make detailed settings for these items, click [ Edit ] next to [ Details of Email Notification Settings ] .

C

Click [ Apply ].

D

Quit Web Image Monitor.

On-demand E-mail Notification

A

In the menu area, click [ On-demand E-mail Notification ].

The dialog box for making notification settings appears.

B

Make the following settings:

• Notification Subject: Enter a text string to be added to the subject line of return e-mails.

• Items in the Access Restriction to Information column: Select whether to restrict accesses based on a specific category of information.

• Items in the Receivable E-mail Address/Domain Name Settings column:

Enter an e-mail address or domain name to use for requesting information by e-mail and to receive its return e-mail.

C

Click [ Apply ].

D

Quit Web Image Monitor.

E-Mail authentication

You can configure mail authentication to prevent illegal use of the mail server.

SMTP Authentication

Specify SMTP authentication (PLAN, LOGIN, CRAM-MD5, and DIGEST-

MD5).

When mail is sent to the SMTP server, authentication is performed using the

SMTP AUTH protocol by prompting the mail originator to enter the user name and password. This prevents illegal use of the SMTP server.

A

B

In the menu area, click [ E-mail ]

Make the following settings:

• SMTP Auth. E-mail Address: Enter the e-mail address.

• SMTP Auth. User Name: Enter the SMTP account name.

213

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• SMTP Auth. Password: To set or change the password for SMTP AU-

TH.

• SMTP Auth. Encryption: Select whether to encrypt the password or not.

C

D

Click [ Apply ]

Quit Web Image Monitor.

POP before SMTP Authentication

Select whether to log on to the POP3 server before sending e-mail.

A

B

In the menu area, click [ E-mail ] .

Make the following settings:

• POP E-mail Address: Enter the e-mail address.

• POP User Name: Enter the POP account name.

• POP Password: To set or change the POP password.

• Timeout setting after POP Auth.: Enter the time available before connecting to the SMTP server after logging on to the POP server.

C

D

Click [ Apply ] .

Quit Web Image Monitor.

On-demand E-mail Notification

To use on-demand e-mail notification, perform the following configuration tasks in Web Image Monitor.

A

In the menu area, click [ E-mail ].

B

Make the following settings:

• Mail Notification Address: Enter the address using alphanumeric characters.

• Mail Notification Reception: Specify whether to use on-demand e-mail notification.

• Mail Notification User Name: Enter the administrator's user name as the mail originator name.

• Mail Notification Password: Enter the password of the mail notification user.

C

Click [ Apply ].

D

Quit Web Image Monitor.

A

Format of on-demand e-mail messages

To use mail notification, you must send an on-demand e-mail message to this machine.

Using your mail software, enter the following:

214

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Item

Subject

From

Description

Enter a request regarding the device. For details, see the table below.

Specify a valid mail address. The device information will be sent to the address specified here.

The mail message must be cannot be more than 10 KB.

E-mail may be incomplete if sent immediately after power on.

Subject field

Format: devicestatus?parameter-name=parameter[&=parameter[&=parameter]]...

The Subject field is not case-sensitive.

Parameter names can be written in any order.

Subject field coding examples

Coding example devicestatus?request=sysconfig&format=text&lang=en devicestatus?request=sysconfig

Action

The device's system configuration information is sent in an English text format.

The device's system configuration information is sent in a preset format and language.

Parameters

Parameter request format lang

Meaning Default

Information to be obtained Mandatory

Mail format

Language for mail body

Mail is sent in the format preset for each mail address.

Mail is sent in the language preset for each mail address.

Parameters that specify the information to be obtained

Information to be obtained

System configuration

Network configuration

Printer configuration

Parameter sysconfig netconfig prtconfig

215

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Information to be obtained

Supplies

Device status

Parameter supply status

Parameters that specify the mail format

Mail format

Text

HTML

XML

Parameter text html xml

Parameters that specify the language for mail bodies

Language

Japanese

English

Parameter ja en

216

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Remote Maintenance by telnet

Remote Maintenance should be password-protected so that access is allowed to administrators only.

The password is the same as the one of Web Image Monitor administrator.

When the password is changed using “mshell”, other passwords change also.

Some commands cannot be used depending on your printer.

Using telnet

Follow the procedure below to use telnet.

Only one user at a time can log on to perform remote maintenance.

A

Use the IP address or the host name of the printer to start telnet.

% telnetIP_address

B

Enter your user name and password.

To use default account, enter “admin” as user name, and leave the password blank.

C

Enter a command.

D

Quit telnet.

msh> logout

The configuration message about saving the changes appears.

E

Enter “yes” to save the changes, and then press the { # Enter } key.

If you do not want to save the changes, enter “no”, and then press the { # Enter } key. To make further changes, enter “return” at the command line, and then press the { # Enter } key.

If the message “Can not write NVRAM information” appears, the changes are not saved. Repeat the procedure above.

When the changes are saved, the network interface board is reset automatically with that changes.

When the network interface board resets, the print job in print process will be printed. However, print jobs in queue will be canceled.

217

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

access

Use the “access” command to view and configure access control. You can also specify two or more access ranges.

View settings

msh> access

Configuration

msh> access range “start-address end-address”

• represents a target number between 1 and 5. (Up to five access ranges can be registered and selected.)

Example: to specify accessible IP addresses between 192.168.0.10 and

192.168.0.20: msh> access 1 range 192.168.0.10 192.168.0.20

Access control initialization

msh> access flush

• Use the “flush” command to restore the default settings so that all access ranges become “0.0.0.0”.

The access range restricts computers from use of the printer by IP address.

If you do not need to restrict printing, make the setting “0.0.0.0”.

Valid ranges must be from lower (start address) to higher (end address).

Up to five access ranges can be specified. The entry is invalid if the target number is omitted.

You cannot access Web Image Monitor from a restricted IP address.

appletalk

Use the “appletalk” command to view and configure Appletalk parameters.

View settings

msh> appletalk

• [2] means “active” and [0] means “inactive”.

• The default is [2].

Changing PAP timeout configuration

msh> appletalk ptimeout value > 0

• Timeout value becomes effective.

msh> appletalk ptimeout value = 0

218

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• Timeout value becomes ineffective.

autonet

Use the “autonet” command to configure AutoNet parameters.

View settings

The following command displays the current AutoNet settings: msh> autonet

Configuration

You can configure AutoNet settings.

msh> autonet {on|off}

• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.

Current interface priority configuration display

msh> autonet priority

Interface priority configuration

msh> autonet priority “interface_name”

• You can give interface's AutoNet parameter priority.

• Priority settings are available when multiple interfaces are installed.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

If an interface is not selected, the current interface connection settings remain in effect.

For details about AutoNet, refer to autonet parameters.

btconfig

Use the “btconfig” command to make Bluetooth settings.

View settings

Bluetooth settings are displayed.

msh> btconfig

219

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Mode settings

You can set the Bluetooth operation mode to {private} or {public}.

msh. btconfig mode {private | public}

• The default is {public}.

devicename

Use the “devicename” command to display and change the printer name.

View settings

msh> devicename

Printer name configuration

msh> devicename name “string”

• Enter a printer name using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.

• Set single names for each printer.

Printer name initialization

msh> devicename clear name

• Reset the printer name to its default.

dhcp

Use the “dhcp” command to configure DHCP settings.

View settings

The following command displays the current DHCP settings.

msh> dhcp

Configuration

You can configure DHCP.

msh> dhcp “interface_name” {on|off}

• Click {on} to enable DHCP. Click {off} to disable DHCP.

• If the DNS server address and domain name are obtained from DHCP, be sure to click {on}.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

220

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Interface name wlan

Interface configured

IEEE 802.11b interface

Current interface priority configuration display

msh> dhcp priority

Interface priority configuration

msh> dhcp priority “interface_name”

• You can select which interface has DHCP parameter priority.

• Priority settings are available when multiple interfaces are installed.

DNS server address selection

msh> dhcp dnsaddr {dhcp | static}

• Specify whether to obtain the DNS server address from the DHCP server or use the address set by a user.

• To obtain the DNS server address from the DHCP server, specify “dhcp”.

To use the address set by a user, specify “static”.

Domain name selection

msh> dhcp domainname {dhcp | static}

• Specify whether to obtain the domain name from the DNS server or use the domain name set by a user.

• To obtain the domain name from the DHCP server, specify “dhcp”. To use the domain name set by a user, specify “static”.

For details about DHCP functions, see

p.319 “Using DHCP”

.

For details about setting the DNS server address, see p.222 “dns” .

For details about setting the domain name, see

p.224 “domainname” .

diprint

The direct printing port enables direct printing from a network-connected computer.

Use the “diprint” command to change direct printing port settings.

View settings

The following command displays the current direct printing port settings: msh> diprint

Example output:

221

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer port 9100 timeout=300(sec) bidirect on conn multi apl async

• The “port” specifies the port number of the direct printing port.

• The “bidirect” setting indicates whether the direct printing port is bidirectional or not.

Setting timeout

msh> diprint timeout [30~65535]

• You can specify the timeout interval to use when the printer is expecting data from the network.

• The default is 300 seconds.

Setting bidirect

msh> diprint bidirect {on | off}

• You can specify whether the direct printing port is bidirectional or not.

Specifying the number of concurrent connections

msh> diprint conn [multi | single]

The above command specifies the number of concurrent diprint connections.

Specify “multi” for multiple connections or “single” for a single connection.

Specifying synchronization

msh> diprint apl [async | sync]

The above command specifies whether to synchronize disconnection and application termination. Specify “sync” if you want to perform synchronization, or

“async” otherwise.

dns

Use the “dns” command to configure or display DNS (Domain Name System) settings.

View settings

The following command displays current DNS settings: msh> dns

DNS server configuration

The following command enables or disables the DNS server address: msh> dns “number” server “server address”

The following command displays a configuration using the IP address

192.168.15.16 on a DNS 1 server:

222

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer msh> dns 1 server 192.168.15.16

• You can register up to three DNS server numbers.

• Applicable address numbers are 1 to 3. You can register up to three addresses.

• You cannot use “255.255.255.255” as the DNS server address.

Dynamic DNS function setting

msh> dns “interface_name” ddns {on|off}

• You can set the dynamic DNS function “active” or “inactive”.

• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

Specifying the record overlap operation

msh> dns overlap {update|add}

• You can specify operations performed when records overlap.

• update

To delete old records and register new records.

• add

To add new records and store the old records.

• When CNAME overlaps, it is always changed, irrespective of settings.

CNAME registration

msh> dns cname {on|off}

• You can specify whether to register CNAME.

• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.

• The CNAME registered is the default name beginning with rnp. CNAME cannot be changed.

A records registration

msh> dns arecord {dhcp|own}

• {dhcp}

You can specify the method of registering an A record when the dynamic

DNS function is enabled and DHCP is used.

• {own}

To register an A record using the printer as the DNS client.

223

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

The DNS server address and the domain name already designated are used for the registration.

Record updating interval settings

msh> dns interval “time”

• You can specify the interval after which records are updated when using the dynamic DNS function.

• The updating interval is specified hourly. It can be entered between 1 and

255 hours.

• The default is 24 hours.

domainname

Use the “domainname” command to display or configure the domain name settings.

You can configure the Ethernet interface, IEEE 1394 interface, or IEEE 802.11b

interface.

View settings

The following command displays the current domain name: msh> domainname

Interface domain configuration

msh> domainname “interface_name”

Setting the Domain Name

msh> domainname “interface_name” name “domain name”

• A domain name can be entered using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.

• The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same domain name.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface ether ip1394 wlan

Interface set

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

Deleting the Domain Name

msh> domainname “interface_name” clear name

224

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

help

Use the “help” command to display the available command list and the procedures for using those commands.

Command list display

msh> help

Display of procedure for using commands

msh> help “command_name”

hostname

Use the “hostname” command to change the printer name.

View settings

msh> hostname

Configuration

msh> hostname “interface_name” “printer_name”

• Enter the printer name using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.

• You cannot use a printer name starting with “RNP” or “rnp”.

• The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same printer name.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

Initializing the printer name for each interface

msh>hostname “interface_name” clear name

ifconfig

Use the “ifconfig” command to configure TCP/IP (IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address, default gateway address) for the printer.

View settings

msh> ifconfig

225

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Configuration

msh> ifconfig “interface_name” “parameter” “address”

• If you did not enter an interface name, it is automatically set to the Ethernet interface.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet Interface

IEEE 1394 Interface

IEEE 802.11b Interface

Netmask configuration

msh> ifconfig “interface_name” netmask “address”

Broadcast address configuration

msh> ifconfig “interface_name” broadcast “address”

Changing the Interface

msh> ifconfig “interface” up

• You can specify either the Ethernet interface or IEEE 802.11b interface when using the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit.

You cannot specify the IEEE 1394 interface.

The following explains how to configure an IP address 192.168.15.16 on

Ethernet interface.

msh> ifconfig ether 192.168.15.16

The following explains how to configure a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 on

Ethernet interface.

msh> ifconfig ether netmask 255.255.255.0

To get the above addresses, contact your network administrator.

Use the default configuration if you cannot obtain setting addresses.

The IP address, subnet mask and broadcast address are the same as that for the ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface.

When installing the optional 1394 Interface board, set the IP address and subnet mask so that it does not overlap with the ethernet interface or the IEEE

1394 interface.

TCP/IP configuration is the same for both Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b interface. If interfaces are changed, the new interface inherits the configuration.

Use “0x” as the initial two letters of a hexadecimal address.

226

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

info

Use the “info” command to display printer information such as paper tray, output tray, and printer language.

Printer information display

msh> info

For details about displayed contents, see

p.248 “Getting Printer Information over the Network” .

ipp

Use the “ipp” command to configure IPP settings.

Viewing settings

The following command displays the current IPP settings: msh> ipp

Example output: timeout=900(sec) auth basic

• The “timeout” setting specifies how many seconds the computer tries to send print jobs when no connection can be made to the network printer.

• The “auth” setting indicates the user authorization mode.

IPP timeout configuration

Specify how many seconds the computer waits before canceling an interrupted print job. The time can be entered between 30 to 65535 seconds.

msh> ipp timeout [30 - 65535]

IPP user authorization configuration

Use IPP user authorization to restrict users to print with IPP. The default is

“off”.

msh> ipp auth {basic|digest|off}

• User authorization settings are “basic” and “digest”.

• Use “off” to remove a user's authorization.

• If user authorization is specified, register a user name. You can register up to 10 users.

IPP user configuration

Use the following command: msh> ipp user

The following message appears:

227

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer msh> Input user number (1 to 10):

Enter the number, user name, and password.

msh> IPP user name:user1 msh> IPP password:*******

After configuring the settings, the following message appears:

User configuration changed.

netware

Use the “netware” command to configure the NetWare settings such as the print server name or file server name.

Netware Printer Server Names

msh> netware pname

• Enter the NetWare print server name using up to 47 characters.

Netware File Server Names

msh> netware fname

• Enter the NetWare file server name using up to 47 characters.

Encap type

msh> netware encap [802.3/802.2/snap/ethernet2/auto]

Remote Printer Number

msh> netware rnum

Timeout

msh> netware timeout

Printer server mode

msh> netware mode pserver msh> netware mode ps

Remote printer mode

msh> netware mode rprinter msh> netware mode rp

NDS context name

msh> netware context

SAP interval

msh> netware “sap_interval”

228

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Setting login mode for file server

msh> netware login server

Setting login mode for NDS tree

msh> netware login tree

Setting login mode for NDS tree name

msh> netware tree “NDS name”

Displaying the current file transfer protocol

msh> netware trans

Setting

TCP/IP + IPX (TCP/IP priority)

TCP/IP + IPX (IPX priority)

TCP/IP

IPX

Display

“TCP/IP + IPX(TCP/IP priority)”

“TCP/IP + IPX(IPX priority)”

“TCP/IP”

“IPX”

Specifying the file transfer protocol

msh> netware trans tcppri

• The above command specifies TCP/IP and IPX(TCP/IP priority) as the file transfer protocol.

msh> netware trans ipxpri

• The above command specifies TCP/IP and IPX (IPX priority) as the file transfer protocol.

msh> netware trans tcp

• The above command specifies TCP/IP as the file transfer protocol.

msh> netware trans ipx

• The above command specifies IPX as the file transfer protocol.

passwd

Use the “passwd” command to change the remote maintenance password.

Changing the Password

msh> passwd

• Enter the current password.

• Enter the new password.

• Enter the new password once again.

229

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Changing the administrator's password

msh> passwd adminID

• When [New password:] appears, enter the new password.

• When [Retype new password:] appears, re-enter the new password.

This operation can only be performed by users who have supervisor permission.

When changing the password via telnet, take adequate security measures to prevent information leakage.

Be sure not to forget or lose the password.

The password can be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Passwords are case-sensitive. For example, “R” is not the same as “r”.

prnlog

Use the “prnlog” command to obtain printer log information.

Print logs display

msh> prnlog

• Displays 16 previous print jobs.

msh> prnlog ID Number

• Specify the ID number of the displayed print log information to display additional details about a print job.

For details about displayed contents, see

p.248 “Getting Printer Information over the Network” .

rendezvous

Use the “rendezvous” command to display rendezvous-related settings.

View settings

Rendezvous settings are displayed.

msh> rendezvous

Current computer name display

msh> rendezvous cname

Display information about the current printer location

msh> rendezvous location

230

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Rendezvous computer name setting

You can specify the rendezvous computer name.

msh> rendezvous cname “computer name”

• The computer name can be entered using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.

rendezvous Installation location information setting

You can enter information about the location where the printer is installed.

msh> rendezvous location “location”

• Information about location can be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

Setting order of priority for each protocol

• diprint msh> rendezvous diprint [0-99]

• lpr msh> rendezvous lpr [0-99]

• ipp msh> rendezvous ipp [0-99]

You can specify the order of priority for “diprint”, “lpr”, and “ipp”. Smaller numbers indicate higher priority.

IP TTL setting

msh> rendezvous ipttl {1-255}

You can specify the IP TTL (the number of routers a packet can pass through).

The default is 255.

Resetting the computer name and location information

You can reset the computer name and location information.

msh> rendezvous clear {cname | location}

• cname

Reset the computer name. The default computer name will be displayed when the computer is restarted.

• location

Reset the location information. The previous location information will be deleted.

Interface configuration

msh> rendezvous linklocal “interface_name”

• If many types of interface are installed, configure the interface that communicates with linklocal address.

231

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

If you do not specify an interface, the Ethernet interface is automatically selected.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

route

Use the “route” command to control the routing table.

All route information display

msh> route get

Specified route information display

msh> route “destination”

• Specify the IP address to destination.

Enabling/disabling Specified Destination

msh> route active {host|net} “destination” {on | off}

• You can turn the specified destination on or off. Host becomes the default setting.

Adding Routing Table

msh> route add {host|net} “destination” “gateway”

• Adds a host or network route to “destination”, and a gateway address to

“gateway” in the table.

• Specify the IP address to destination and gateway.

• Host becomes the default setting.

Setting Default Gateway

msh> route add default gateway

Deleting Specified destination from Routing Table

msh> route delete {host|net} “destination”

• Host becomes the default setting.

• IP address of destination can be specified.

232

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Route Flush

msh> route flush

The maximum number of routing tables is 16.

Set a gateway address when communicating with devices on an external network.

The same gateway address is shared by all interfaces.

set

Use the “set” command to set the protocol information display “active” or “inactive”.

View settings

The following command displays protocol information (active/inactive).

msh> set tcpip msh> set appletalk msh> set netware msh> set smb msh> set scsiprint

• scsiprint is available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.

msh> set ip1394

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

msh> set pictbridge

• pictbridge can be specified only when the pictbridge is installed.

msh> set protocol

• When protocol is specified, information about TCP/IP, AppleTalk, Netware, and SMB appears.

msh> set lpr msh> set ftp msh> set rsh msh> set diprint msh> set web msh> set snmp msh> set ssl msh> set nrs msh> set rfu msh> set ipp

233

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer msh> set http msh> set rendezvous msh> set nbt msh> set ssdp msh> set parallel msh> set bluetooth msh> set usb msh> set device

Configuration

• Enter “up”to enable protocol, and enter “down” to disable protocol.

You can set the protocol to “active” or “inactive”.

msh> set tcpip {up | down}

• If you disable TCP/IP, you cannot use remote access after logging off. If you did this by mistake, you can use the control panel to enable remote access via TCP/IP.

• Disabling TCP/IP also disables ip1394, lpr, ftp, rsh, diprint, web, snmp, ssl, ipp, http, and rendezvous msh> set appletalk {up | down} msh> set netware {up | down} msh> set smb {up | down} msh> set scsiprint {up | down}

• scsiprint is available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.

msh> set pictbridge {up | down}

• pictbridge can be specified only when the pictbridge is installed.

msh> set ip1394 {up | down}

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

msh> set lpr {up | down} msh> set ftp {up | down} msh> set rsh {up | down} msh> set diprint {up | down} msh> set web {up | down} msh> set snmp {up | down} msh> set ssl {up | down}

• If Secured Sockets Layer (SSL, an encryption protocol) function is not available for the printer, you cannot use the function by enabling it.

msh> set nrs {up | down} msh> set rfu {up | down}

234

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer msh> set ipp {up | down} msh> set http {up | down} msh> set rendezvous {up | down} msh> set nbt {up | down} msh> set ssdp {up | down} msh> set parallel {up | down} msh> set bluetooth {up | down} msh> set usb {up | down} msh> set device {up | down}

show

Use the “show” command to display network interface board configuration settings.

View settings

msh> show

• If “-p” is added, you can view settings one by one.

For details about the information displayed, see

p.257 “Configuring the Network Interface Board” .

slp

Use “slp” command to configure SLP settings.

msh> slp ttl “ttl_val”

• You can search the NetWare server using SLP in the PureIP environment of

NetWare 5/5.1 and Netware 6/6.5. Using the “slp” command, you can configure the value of TTL which can be used by SLP multicast packet.

• The default value of TTL is 1. A search is executed only within a local segment. If the router does not support multicast, the settings are not available even if the TTL value is increased.

• The acceptable TTL value is between 1 and 255.

smb

Use the “smb” command to configure or delete the computer or workgroup name for SMB.

Computer Name settings

msh> smb comp

235

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• Set computer name using up to 15 characters. Names beginning with

“RNP” or “rnp” cannot be entered.

Working Group Name settings

msh> smb group

• Set workgroup name using up to 15 characters

Comment settings

msh> smb comment

• Set comment using up to 31 characters

Notify print job completion

msh> smb notif {on | off}

• To notify print job completion, specify “on”. Otherwise, specify “off”

Deleting Computer Name

msh> smb clear comp

Deleting Group Name

msh> smb clear group

Deleting Comment

msh> smb clear comment

Protocol settings

msh> smb protocol [tcpip {up | down}]

• Enable or disable TCP/IP. Specify “up” to enable, and “down” to disable.

Display

msh> smb protocol

snmp

Use the “snmp” command to display and edit SNMP configuration settings such as the community name.

View settings

msh> snmp

• Default access settings 1 is as follows:

Community name:public

IP address:0.0.0.0

Access type:read-only / trap off

• Default access settings 2 is as follows:

Community name:admin

236

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

IP address:0.0.0.0

Access type:read-write / trap off

• If “-p” is added, you can view settings one by one.

• To display the current community, specify its registration number.

Display

msh> snmp ?

Community name configuration

msh> snmp “number” name “community_name”

• You can configure ten SNMP access settings numbered 1-10.

• The printer cannot be accessed from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client if “public” is not registered in numbers 1-10.

When changing the community name, use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and SNMP Setup Tool to correspond with printer settings.

• The community name can be entered using up to 15 characters.

Deleting community name

msh> snmp “number” clear name

Access type configuration

msh> snmp “number” type “access_type”

Access type no read write trap

Type of access permission not accessible read only read and write user is notified of trap messages

Protocol configuration

msh> snmp {ip | ipx} {on | off}

• Use the following command to set protocols “active” or “inactive”: If you set a protocol “inactive”, all access settings for that protocol are disabled.

• Specify “ip” for TCP/IP, or “ipx” for IPX/SPX.

• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.

• IEEE 1394 interface is available for TCP/IP only.

Configuration of protocol for each registration number

msh> snmp “number” active {ip | ipx} {on | off}

• To change the protocol of access settings, use the following command.

However, if you have disabled a protocol with the above command, activating it here has no effect.

237

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Access configuration

msh> snmp “number” {ip/addr | ipx} “address”

• You can configure a host address according to the protocol used.

• The network interface board accepts requests only from hosts that have addresses with access types of “read-only” or “read-write”. Enter “0” to have network interface board accept requests from any host without requiring a specific type of access.

• Enter a host address to deliver “trap” access type information to.

• To specify TCP/IP, enter “ip” followed by a space, and then the IP address.

• To specify IPX/SPX, enter “ipx” followed by a space, the IPX address followed by a decimal, and then the MAC address of the network interface board.

sysLocation configuration

msh> snmp location

Deleting sysLocation

msh> snmp clear location

sysContact setting

msh> snmp contact

Deleting sysContact

msh> snmp clear contact

SNMP v1v2 function configuration

msh> snmp v1v2 {on | off}

• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable.

SNMP v3 function configuration

msh> snmp v3 {on | off}

• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable.

SNMP TRAP configuration

msh> snmp trap {v1 | v2 | v3} {on | off}

• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable.

Remote Configuration Authorization configuration

msh> snmp remote {on | off}

• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable.

SNMP v3 TRAP configuration display

msh> snmp v3trap

238

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer msh> snmp v3trap {1- 5}

• If a number from 1-5 is entered, settings are displayed for that number only.

Configuring a sending address for SNMP v3 TRAP

msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} {ip| ipx} address

Configuring a sending protocol for SNMP v3 TRAP

msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} active {ip/addr | ipx} {on | off}

Configuring a user account for SNMP v3 TRAP

msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} account account_name

• Enter an account name using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

Deleting an SNMP v3 TRAP user account

msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} clear account

Configuring an SNMP v3 encryption algorithm

msh> snmp v3auth {md5 | sha1}

Configuring SNMP v3 encryption

msh> snmp v3priv {auto | on}

• If you select “auto”, the print job will be encrypted when encryption is possible.

• If you select “on”, Clear Text communication is not possible, and encryption password must be set before encryption communication can be used.

Encryption is possible when the security option is installed correctly and the password is specified.

sntp

The printer clock can be synchronized with a NTP server clock using Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). Use the “sntp” command to change SNTP settings.

View settings

msh> sntp

NTP server address configuration

You can specify the IP address of the NTP server.

msh> sntp server “IP_address”

Interval configuration

msh> sntp interval “polling_time”

239

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

• You can specify the interval at which the printer synchronizes with the operator-specified NTP server. The default is 60 minutes.

• The interval can be entered between 16 and 16,384 minutes.

• If you set 0, the printer synchronizes with the NTP server only when you turn the printer on. After that, the printer does not synchronize with the NTP server.

Time-zone configuration

msh> sntp timezone “+/-hour_time”

• You can specify the time difference between the printer clock and NTP server clock. Time is in 24-hour format.

spoolsw

Use the “spoolsw” command to configure Job Spool settings.

You can only specify diprint, lpr, ipp, ftp and smb protocol.

• The “spoolsw” command for configuring Job Spool settings is available only when the hard disk is installed.

View settings

The Job Spool setting appears.

msh> spoolsw

Job Spool setting

msh> spoolsw spool {on | off}

Specify “on” to enable Job Spool, or “off” to disable it.

Resetting Job spool setting

msh> spoolsw clear job {on | off}

• When the printer power is cut during job spooling, this determines whether to reprint the spooled job.

Protocol configuration

msh> spoolsw diprint {on | off} msh> spoolsw lpr {on | off} msh> spoolsw ipp {on | off} msh> spoolsw smb {on | off} msh> spoolsw ftp {on | off}

• You can specify the settings for diprint, lpr, ipp, and smb.

240

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

sprint

Use the “sprint” command to make settings for IEEE 1394 (SCSI print).

View settings

IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) settings are displayed.

msh> sprint

Bidirectional configuration for IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)

Use this setting to set IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) bidirectional.

The default is “on”.

msh> sprint bidi {on | off}

ssdp

Use the “ssdp” command to view and configue ssdp parameters.

View settings

msh> ssdp

Setting the effective time

msh> ssdp profile [1801 | 86400]

The default is 10800 seconds.

Setting the advertise packet TTL

msh> ssdp ttl [1 | 225]

The default is 4.

status

The printer status can be checked using the following command:

Messages

msh> status

For details, see

p.248 “Current Printer Status”

.

syslog

Use the “syslog” command to display the information stored in the printer's system log.

241

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

View message

msh> syslog

For details about the information displayed, see p.263 “System Log Information” .

upnp

Use the “upnp” command to display and configure the universal plug and play.

Public URL display

msh> upnp url

Public URL configuration

msh> upnp url “string”

• Enter the URL string in the character string.

web

Use the “web” command to display and configure parameters on Web Image

Monitor.

View Settings

msh> web

URL Configuration

You can set URLs linked by clicking [ URL ] on Web Image Monitor.

Specify “1” or “2” for x as the number corresponding to the URL. Up to two

URLs can be registered and specified.

msh> web url http://”The URL or IP address you want to register”/

Deleting URLs registered as link destinations

msh> web x clear url

Specify “1” or “2” for x as the corresponding number to the URL.

Link name configuration

You can enter the name for [ URL ] that appears on Web Image Monitor.

Specify “1” or “2” for x as the corresponding number to the link name.

msh> web name “Name you want to display”

Deleting URL names registered as link destinations

msh> web x clear name

Specify “1” or “2” for x as the number corresponding to the link name.

242

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Help URL Configuration

You can set URLs linked by clicking [ Help ] or [ ?

] on Web Image Monitor.

msh> web help http://”Help URL or IP address”/help/

Deleting Help URL

msh> web clear help

wiconfig

Use the “wiconfig” command to make settings for IEEE 802.11b.

View settings

msh> wiconfig

View IEEE 802.11b settings

msh> wiconfig cardinfo

• If IEEE 802.11b is not working correctly, its information is not displayed.

Configuration

msh> wiconfig “parameter”

Parameter mode [ap|adhoc|802.11adhoc] ssid ID value channel frequency channel no.

enc [on|off]

Value configured

You can set the infrastructure mode (ap) , the

802.11 Ad hoc mode (802.11 adhoc), or the ad hoc mode (adhoc).

The default is ad hoc mode.

You can make settings for the SSID in the infrastructure mode.

Usable characters are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).

An SSID value is set automatically to the nearest access point if no setting is made.

If no setting is made for the ad hoc mode, the same value as for the infrastructure mode or an ASSID value is automatically set.

You can enable or disable the WEP function.

To enable the WEP function, specify [on]; to disable it, specify [off].

To start the WEP function, enter the correct

WEP key.

You can enable or disable the WEP function.

To enable the WEP function, specify [on]; to disable it, specify [off].

To start the WEP function, enter the correct

WEP key.

243

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Parameter key [ key value ] val [1|2|3|4] keyphrase [ phrase encval [1|2|3|4] auth [open|shared]

] val [1|2|3|4]

Value configured

You can specify the WEP key when entering in hexadecimal.

With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10 digit hexadecimals. With a 128-bit WEP, you can use 26 digit hexadecimals.

Up to four WEP keys can be registered.

Specify the number to be registered with

“val”.

When a WEP is specified by key, the WEP specified by key phrase is overwritten.

To use this function, set the same key number and WEP key for all ports that transmit data to each other.

You can omit the numbers with “val”. The key number is set to 1 when making these omissions.

You can specify the WEP key when entering in ASCII.

With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10 digit hexadecimals. With a 128-bit WEP, you can use 26 digit hexadecimals.

Up to four WEP keys can be registered.

Specify the number to be registered with

“val”.

When a WEP is specified by key phrase, the

WEP specified by key is overwritten.

To use this function, set the same key number and WEP key for all ports that transmit data to each other.

You can omit the numbers with “val”. The key number is set to 1 when making these omissions.

You can specify which of the four WEP keys is used for packet encoding. “1” is set if a number is not specified.

You can set an authorization mode when using WEP. The specified value and authorized mode are as follows: open: open system authorized (default) shared: shared key authorized rate

244

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Parameter rate [auto|11m|5.5m|2m|1m]

Value configured

You can set the IEEE 802.11b transmitting speed.

The speed you specify here is the speed at which data is sent. You can receive data at any speed.

auto: automatically set (default)

11m: 11 Mbps fixed

5.5m: 5.5 Mbps fixed

2m: 2 Mbps fixed

1m: 1 Mbps fixed

wins

Use the “wins” command to configure WINS server settings.

Viewing settings

msh> wins

• If the IP address obtained from DHCP differs from the WINS IP address, the DHCP address is the valid address.

Configuration

msh> wins “interface_name” {on | off}

• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.

• Be sure to specify the interface.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

Address configuration

Use the following command to configure a WINS server IP address: msh> wins “interface_name” {primary|secondary} “IP address”

• Use the “primary” command to configure a primary WINS server IP address.

• Use the “secondary” command to configure a secondary WINS server IP address.

• Do not use “255.255.255.255” as the IP address.

245

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

NBT (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Scope ID Selection

You can specify the NBT scope ID.

msh> wins “interface_name” scope “scope ID”

• The scope ID can be entered using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.

• Be sure to specify the interface.

• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.

• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.

Interface name ether ip1394 wlan

Interface configured

Ethernet interface

IEEE 1394 interface

IEEE 802.11b interface

246

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

SNMP

The SNMP agent operating on UDP and IPX is incorporated into the built-in

Ethernet board and optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit of this printer. Also, the

SNMP agent operating on UDP is incorporated in the optional IEEE 1394 interface board.

Using the SNMP manager, you can get information about the printer.

If you changed the printer's community name, change the configuration of the connected computer accordingly, using SNMP Setup Tool. For details, see

SNMP Setup Tool Help.

The default community names are [ public ] and [ admin ] . You can get MIB information using these community names.

Start SNMP Setup Tool

• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0:

Click the [ Start ] button.

Point to [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ] on the [ Programs ] menu.

Click [ SNMP Setup Tool ] .

• Windows XP:

Click the [ Start ] button.

Point to [ SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ] on the [ All Programs ] menu.

Click [ SNMP Setup Tool ] .

Supported MIBs (SNMPv1/v2)

• MIB-II

• PrinterMIB

• HostResourceMIB

• RicohPrivateMIB

Supported MIBs (SNMPv3)

• MIB-II

• PrinterMIB

• HostResourceMIB

• RicohPrivateMIB

• SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB

• SNMP-TARGET-MIB

• SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB

• SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB

• SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB

247

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Getting Printer Information over the

Network

This section explains details of each item displayed in the printer status and information.

Current Printer Status

The printer status can be checked using the following commands:

• UNIX: Use the “lpq” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.

• mshell: Use the “status” command.

Messages

Access Restricted

Add staples (Booklet: Back)

Add staples (Booklet: Both)

Add staples (Booklet: Front)

Adjusting...

Call Service Center

Canceled

Canceling Job...

Card/Counter not inserted

Coin or amount not inserted

Coin/Key Counter not inserted

Configuring...

Cover Open: ADF

Cover Open: Duplex Unit

Cover Open: Finisher

Cover Open: Front

Cover Open: Front/Left

Cover Open: Paper Exit / Rear

Cover Open: Right

Cover Open: Top

Data Size Error

Description

The job was canceled because user have no authority.

The staple of booklet finisher (back) is exhausted.

The staple of booklet finisher is exhausted.

The staple of booklet finisher (front) is exhausted.

The machine is initializing or calibrating.

There is a malfunction in the machine.

The job is reset.

The job is being reset.

The machine is waiting for prepaid card or key.

The machine is waiting for coin to be inserted.

The machine is waiting for coin or key counter.

Setting is being changed.

The document feeder is open.

The cover of the duplex unit is open.

The cover of Finisher is open.

The front cover is open.

The front cover or left cover is open.

The paper exit cover or rear cover is open.

The right cover is open.

The top cover is open.

The data size error occurred.

248

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

Empty: Black Toner

Empty: Cyan Toner

Empty: Magenta Toner

Empty: Yellow Toner

Energy Saver Mode

Error

Error at Printer: Red LED

Error in Printer

Error: Address Book

Error: Command Transmission

Error: DIMM Value

Error: Ethernet Board

Error: HDD Board

Error: IEEE1394 Board

Error: Memory Switch

Error: Optional Font

Error: Optional RAM

Error: Parallel I/F Board

Error: PDL

Error: USB Interface

Error: Wireless Card

Error: Wireless Card or Board

Exceed Booklet Stapling Limit

Full: Copy Tray

Full: Finisher

Full: Finisher Shift Tray

Full: Finisher Shift Tray 1, 2

Full: Finisher Upper Tray

Description

The black toner cartridge is almost empty.

The cyan toner cartridge is almost empty.

The magenta toner cartridge is almost empty.

The yellow toner cartridge is almost empty.

The machine is in Energy Saver Mode.

An error has occurred.

An error has occurred.

An error has occurred.

An error has occurred in the data of the address book.

An error has occurred in the machine.

A memory error occurred.

An Ethernet board error has occurred.

A hard disk drive board error has occurred.

An IEEE 1394 interface board error has occurred.

A memory switch error has occurred.

An error has occurred in the font file of the machine.

An error has occurred in the optional memory unit.

An error has occurred in the parallel interface.

An error has occurred in the page description language.

An error has occurred in the USB interface.

Wireless card is not inserted during start up, or the IEEE 802.11b interface unit or the wireless card is taken out after start up.

An error has occurred in the IEEE 802.11b interface unit.

The printing has exceeded the stapling limit of the booklet finisher.

The output paper tray is full.

Finisher tray is full.

Shift tray of Finisher is full.

The shift tray 1 and 2 of Finisher are full.

The upper tray of Finisher is full.

249

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

Full: Hole Punch Receptacle

Full: Standard Tray

Full: Waste Toner

Full: Waste Toner Bottle

Hex Dump Mode

Immed. Trans. not connected

Immediate Transmission Failed

In Use: Copier

In Use: Fax

In Use: Finisher

In Use: Input Tray

In Use: Staple Unit

Independent-supplier Toner

Key Card not inserted

Key Card/Counter not inserted

Key Counter not inserted

Loading Toner...

Low: Black Toner

Low: Cyan Toner

Low: Magenta Toner

Low: Toner

Low: Yellow Toner

Malfunction: Booklet Processor

Malfunction: Ext. Charge Unit

Malfunction: Finisher

Malfunction: Interposer

Malfunction: LargeCapacity Tray

Malfunction: Output Tray

Description

Punch Chip receptacle for hole punch is full.

The output paper tray is full.

Waste toner is full.

Waste toner bottle is full.

It is a hex dump mode.

It did not connect directly with the other party of the transmission.

An error has occurred while transmitting directly.

The copier is being used.

The fax is being used.

Other functions is using Finisher.

Other functions is using the input tray.

Other functions is using the staple unit.

Toner that is not recommended is set.

The machine is waiting for key card to be inserted.

The machine is waiting for key card or key counter to be inserted.

The machine is waiting for key counter to be left in it.

Toner is being supplied.

The black toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.

The cyan toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.

The magenta toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.

The black toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.

The yellow toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.

There is a problem with booklet finisher.

There is a problem with external charge unit.

There is a problem with Finisher.

There is a problem with Interposer.

There is a problem with LargeCapacity tray.

There is a problem with output tray.

250

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

Malfunction: Staple Unit

Malfunction: Tray 1

Malfunction: Tray 2

Malfunction: Tray 3

Malfunction: Tray 4

Malfunction: Z-folding unit

Memory Low: Copy

Memory Low: Data Storage

Memory Low: Fax Scanning

Memory Low: Scanning

Miscellaneous Error

Mismatch: Paper Size

Mismatch: Paper Size and Type

Mismatch: Paper Type

Near Replacing: Black PCU

Near Replacing: Color PCU

Near Replacing: Develop. Unit C

Near Replacing: Develop. Unit K

Near Replacing: Develop. Unit M

Near Replacing: Develop. Unit Y

Near Replacing: Fusing Unit

Near Replacing: Maintenance Kit

Near Replacing: Transfer Unit

Nearly Full: Waste Toner

Need more Staples

No Paper: Interposer Tray

No Paper: LCT

No Paper: Selected Tray

No Paper: Tray 1

No Paper: Tray 2

Description

There is a problem with the staple unit.

There is a problem with tray 1.

There is a problem with tray 2.

There is a problem with tray 3.

There is a problem with tray 4.

There is a problem with the Z fold unit.

Memory shortage has occurred while the copy was operating.

Memory shortage has occurred while the document was being accumulated.

Memory shortage has occurred while transmitting the fax.

Memory shortage has occurred while the scanner was working.

Other error has occurred.

Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected size.

Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected size and type.

Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of selected type.

Prepare the new black photoconductor unit.

Prepare the new color photoconductor unit.

Prepare the new development unit (cyan).

Prepare the new development unit (black).

Prepare the new development unit (magenta).

Prepare the new development unit (yellow).

Prepare the new fusing unit.

Prepare the new maintenance kit.

Prepare the new transfer unit.

Waste toner bottle is nearly full.

Stapler has almost run out of staples.

There is no paper in interposer unit.

There is no paper in Large Capacity tray.

There is no paper in specified tray.

There is no paper in tray 1.

There is no paper in tray 2.

251

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

No Paper: Tray 3

No Paper: Tray 4

Not Detected: B2 Lever

Not Detected: Black Toner

Not Detected: Cyan Toner

Not Detected: Develop. Unit (C)

Not Detected: Develop. Unit (K)

Not Detected: Develop. Unit (M)

Not Detected: Develop. Unit (Y)

Not Detected: Duplex Feed Unit

Not Detected: Finisher

Not Detected: Fusing Unit

Not Detected: Input Tray

Not Detected: Interposer

Not Detected: LCT

Not Detected: Magenta Toner

Not Detected: PCU (C)

Not Detected: PCU (K)

Not Detected: PCU (M)

Not Detected: PCU (Y)

Not Detected: Toner Magazine

Not Detected: Transfer Roller

Not Detected: Transfer Unit

Not Detected: Tray 1

Not Detected: Tray 2

Not Detected: Tray 3

Not Detected: Tray 4

Not Detected: WasteToner Bottle

Description

There is no paper in tray 3.

There is no paper in tray 4.

B2 lever is not correctly set.

Black toner is not correctly set.

Cyan toner is not correctly set.

The development unit (cyan) is not correctly set.

The development unit (black) is not correctly set.

The development unit (magenta) is not correctly set.

The development unit (yellow) is not correctly set.

The duplex feed unit is not correctly set.

Finisher is not correctly set.

The fusing unit is not correctly set.

The paper feed tray is not correctly set.

Interposer unit is not correctly set.

A large amount of paper feed tray is not correctly set.

Magenta toner is not correctly set.

The photoconductor unit (cyan) is not correctly set.

The photoconductor unit (black) is not correctly set.

The photoconductor unit (magenta) is not correctly set.

The photoconductor unit (yellow) is not correctly set.

The toner cartridge is not correctly set.

The transfer roller is not correctly set.

The transfer unit is not correctly set.

Tray 1 is not correctly set.

Tray 2 is not correctly set.

Tray 3 is not correctly set.

Tray 4 is not correctly set.

Waste toner bottle is not correctly set.

252

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

Not Detected: Yellow Toner

Not Detected: Z-fold’g Internal

Not Reached, Data Deleted

Not Reached, Data Removed

Not Reached, Data Stored

Offline

Original on Exposure Glass

Panel Off Mode

Panel Off Mode>>Printing ava.

Paper in Duplex Unit

Paper in Finisher

Paper Misfeed: ADF

Paper Misfeed: Duplex Unit

Paper Misfeed: Input Tray

Paper Misfeed: Internal/Output

Paper Misfeed: Output Tray

Paper on Finisher Shift Tray 2

Paper on FinisherShiftTray1, 2

Prepaid Card not inserted

Print Complete

Printing

Processing

RC Gate Connection Error

Ready

Replace Black PCU

Replace Charger

Replace Cleaning Web

Replace Color PCU

Replace Develop. Unit

Replace Develop. Unit (Black)

Description

Yellow toner is not correctly set.

The Z-fold unit is not correctly set.

Unreached job is deleted.

Unreached job is deleted.

Unreached job is preserved.

Printer is offline.

The original remains on the exposure glass.

The machine is in Panel-Off mode.

The machine is in Control Panel-Off mode.

The paper remains in the duplex unit.

The paper remains in Finisher.

The paper has jammed in Document Feeder.

The paper has jammed in the duplex unit.

The paper has jammed in the input tray.

The paper has jammed inside the machine.

The paper has jammed in output tray.

The paper remains in Finisher Shift Tray 2.

The paper remains in Finisher Shift Tray 1 and

2.

The machine is waiting for prepaid card to be inserted.

The print was completed.

Printing is in progress.

Data is being processed.

Failed connection with RC Gate.

The machine is ready to print.

It is time to replace the black photoconductor unit.

It is time to replace the charger kit.

It is time to replace the Cleaning Web.

It is time to replace the photoconductor unit

(color).

It is time to replace the development unit.

It is time to replace the development unit

(black).

253

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Messages

Replace Develop. Unit (Color)

Replace Develop. Unit (Cyan)

Replace Develop. Unit (Magenta)

Replace Develop. Unit (Yellow)

Replace Fusing Unit

Replace Maintenance Kit

Replace PCU

Replace Transfer Belt

SD Card Authentication failed

Setting Remotely

Skipped due to Error

Storage Complete

Storage Failed

Supplies Order Call failed

Suspend / Resume Key Error

Transmission Aborted

Transmission Complete

Transmission Failed

Tray Error: Chaptering

Tray Error: Duplex Printing

Unit Left Open: ADF

Warming Up...

Description

It is time to replace the development unit (color).

It is time to replace the development unit (cyan).

It is time to replace the development unit (magenta).

It is exchange time of the development unit

(yellow).

It is time to replace the fusing unit.

It is time to replace the maintenance kit.

It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.

It is time to replace the transfer belt.

SD card authentication failed.

The RDS setting is being processed.

Skipped the error.

The storage is complete.

The storage has failed.

The supply order call has failed.

Finisher stop button was pressed.

The transmission was interrupted.

The transmission completion was completed.

The transmission has failed.

The paper feed tray specification error has occurred because chaptering as well as the normal paper use the same tray for printing.

Selected paper tray cannot be used for duplex printing.

Document feeder is opened.

The machine is warming up.

For details about UNIX commands, see UNIX Supplement.

Check the error contents that may be printed in the configuration page. For

details about printing a configuration page, see p.161 “Printing a Configuration Page” .

Printer configuration

You can check the printer configuration using telnet.

254

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

This section explains the checking procedure for input/output tray and printer language.

• UNIX: Use the “info” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.

• mshell: Use the “info” command.

Input Tray

Item

No.

Name

PaperSize

Status

Description

ID number of the paper tray

Name of the paper tray

Size of paper loaded in the paper tray

Current status of the paper tray

• Normal:Normal

• NoInputTray: No tray

• PaperEnd:No paper

Output Tray

Item

No.

Name

Status

Description

ID number of the output tray

Name of the output tray

Current status of the output tray

• Normal:Normal

• PaperExist:Paper exist

• OverFlow:Paper is full

• Error:Other errors

Emulation

Item

No.

Name

Version

Description

ID number of the printer language used by the printer

Name of the printer language used in the printer

Version of the printer language

For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.

For details about mshell “info” commands, see

p.227 “info” .

255

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Understanding the Displayed Information

This section explains how to read status information returned by the network interface board.

Print Job Information

Use the following command to display print job information:

• UNIX: Use the “info” command and “rsh“, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.

• mshell: Use the “info” command.

Item

Rank

Owner

Job

Files

Total Size

Description

Print job status.

• Active

Printing or preparing for printing.

• 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th,...

Waiting to be transferred to the printer.

Print request user name.

Print request number.

The name of the document.

The size of the data. *1

*1 When number of files are set in the single print job, the foremost file is displayed.

For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.

For details about mshell “info” commands, see

p.227 “info” .

Print Log Information

This is a record of the most recent 16 jobs printed.

Use the following command to display print log information:

• UNIX: Use the “prnlog” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.

• telnet : Use the “prnlog” command. See

p.230 “prnlog”

Item

ID

User

Page

Description

Print request ID.

Print request user name.

Number of pages printed

256

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Item

Result

Time

User ID

JobName

Description

Print Request Result

Communication Result

• OK

Print was completed normally. However, the print result may not be as required due to printer problems.

• NG

Printing was not completed normally.

• Canceled

An “rcp”, “rsh”, or “lpr” command print request was canceled, possibly due to the printing application. Not applicable to the

“ftp” or “rprinter” command.

Time the print requested was received.

Time of print request reception

Printer driver-configured User ID.

Appears when the print request ID is specified.

Name of the document for printing

Appears when the print request ID is specified.

For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.

For details about mshell prnlog commands, see p.230 “prnlog” .

Configuring the Network Interface Board

Use the following command to display network interface board settings:

• telnet : Use the “show” command.

Description Item

Common

Mode

Protocol Up/Down

AppleTalk

TCP/IP

Netware

SMB

IP over 1394

SCSI print

PictBridge

Device Up/Down

Centro

[ up ] means “active” and [ down ] means “inactive”.

257

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Description Item

USB

Bluetooth

Ethernet interface

Syslog priority

NVRAM version

Device name

Comment

Location

Contact

Soft switch

AppleTalk

Mode

Net

Object

Type

Zone

TCP/IP

Mode

ftp

lpr

rsh

telnet

diprint

web

http

ftpc

snmp

ipp

autonet

rendezvous

ssl rfu nbt

Internal version number

Internal version number

Printer name

Comment

Location of the printer in the SNMP and Rendezvous information

Administrator information for the printer and contact information in the SNMP information

AppleTalk protocol in selection

Network number

Macintosh printer name

Type of printer

Name of the zone that the printer belongs to

[ up ] means “active” and [ down ] means “inactive”.

258

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Description Item ssdp

EncapType

DHCP

Host name

Address

Netmask

Broadcast

DNS Domain

Gateway

Access Range [ ]

Time server

Time Zone

Time server polling time

SYSLOG server

Home page URL

Home page link name

Netware

EncapType

RPRINTER number

Print server name

File server name

Context name

Switch

Mode

NDS/Bindery

Packet negotiation

Login Mode

Print job timeout

Protocol

SAP interval time

NDS Tree Name

Transfer Protocol

SMB

Switch

Frame type

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (on/off)

IP address

Subnet mask

Broadcast address

DNS domain type

Default gateway address

Access control range

NTP server address

NTP server time difference

NTP server interval

URL of homepage.

URL of home page

Frame type

Remote printer number

Print server name

Name of the connect file server

Context of print server

Active mode

(this value is fixed)

Login mode

Packet timeout

Protocol used

NDS tree name

259

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Item

Mode

Direct print

Notification

Workgroup name

Computer name

Comment

Share name[1]

Protocol

IEEE 802.11b

Device name

DHCP

Address

Netmask

Broadcast

DNS Domain

SSID

Channel range

Channel

Communication mode

Authentication

TX Rate

WEP encryption

Encryption key

IP over 1394

Host name

DHCP

Address

Netmask

Broadcast

DNS Domain

SMTP

Server Name

Port Number

SCSI print

Description

(this value is fixed)

(this value is fixed)

Notification of print job completion

Name of the workgroup

Name of the computer

Comment

Share name (model of the printer)

Printer name

DHCP (on/off)

IP address

Subnet mask

Broadcast address

DNS domaintype

SSID used

Channels available for use

Channel used

IEEE 802.11b interface transmitting mode

IEEE 802.11b interface speed

WEP enabled or disabled

WEP key

DHCP (on/off)

IP address

Subnet mask

Broadcast address

260

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Item

Bidi.

Bluetooth

Bluetooth mode

UPnP

URL

Dns

Server[X]:

Selected DNS Server

Domain Name ether wlan ip1394

Rendezvous

Computer Name(cname)

Local Hostname(ether)

Local Hostname(ip1394)

Local Hostname(wlan)

Location

Priority (diprint)

Priority (lpr)

Priority (ipp)

IP TTL

LinkLocal Route for Multi I/F:

Ethernet (ether)

DDNS ether wlan ip1394

WINS ether

Primary WINS

Description

Bidirectional setting (on/off)

Bluetooth connection mode

IP address of the DNS server

Selected DNS server

Domain name on an Ethernet connection

Domain name on a wireless LAN connection

Computer name

Rendezvous name on an Ethernet connection

Rendezvous name on a wireless LAN connection

Rendezvous name on an IP over 1394 connection

Location of the printer diprint priority number lpr priority number ipp priority number

IP TTL value

[IEEE 802.11b (wlan)] appears when IEEE 802.11b is selected. [IP over 1394 (ip1394)] appears when

IEEE1394 is selected.

Dynamic DNS function on an Ethernet connection

(on/off)

Dynamic DNS function on a wireless LAN connection

(on/off)

Dynamic DNS function on an IP over 1394 connection

(on/off)

IP address of the primary WINS server on an Ethernet connection

261

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Item

Secondary WINS wlan

Primary WINS

Secondary WINS ip1394

Primary WINS

Secondary WINS

SSDP

Ad_Mode

UUID

Profile

TTL

SNMP

SNMPv1v2

SNMPv3 protocol v1Trap v2Trap v3Trap

SNMPv1v2Remoto Setting

SNMPv3 Privacy

AuthFree

AccessRange[X]

Centro

USB

Shell mode

Description

IP address of the secondary WINS server on an Ethernet connection

IP address of the primary WINS server on an IP over

1394 connection

IP address of the secondary WINS server on an IP over

1394 connection

Mode of the remote maintenance tool

262

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message List

This is a list of messages that appear in the printer's system log. The system log can be viewed using the “syslog” command.

System Log Information

Use the following command to display the system log information:

• UNIX: Use the “syslog” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.

• telnet : Use the “syslog” command.

Message Problem and solutions

Access to NetWare server <file server name> denied. Either there is no account for this print server on the NetWare server or the password was incorrect.

(In the print server mode) Login to the file server failed. Make sure that the print server is registered on the file server. If a password is specified for the print server, delete it.

add_sess: bad trap addr:<IpAddress>, community:<community name>

The IP address (0.0.0.0.) is unavailable when the community access type is TRAP. Specify the host IP address for the TRAP destination.

add_sess: community<community name> already defined.

add_sess_ipx: bad trap addr: <IPXaddress>, community:<community name>

The same community name already exists.

Use another community name.

The IPX address (00:00:00:00:00:00) is unavailable when the community access type is

TRAP. Specify the host IPX address for the

TRAP destination.

add_sess_ipx: community <community name> already defined.

The same community name already exists.

Use another community name.

Attach FileServer= <file server name>

Attach to print queue <print queue name>

Cannot create service connection

Connection to the file server as the nearest server has been established.

(In the print server mode) Attached to the print queue.

(In the remote printer mode) Connection to the file server has not been established. The number of file server users may have exceeded the maximum capacity of the file server.

Cannot find rprinter (<print server name>/<printer number>)

Change IP address from DHCP Server.

The printer with the number displayed on the print server does not exist. Make sure that the printer number is registered on the print server.

The IP address changes when DHCP lease is renewed. To always assign the same IP address, set a static IP address to the DHCP server.

263

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message btd is disabled.

centrod is disabled.

child process exec error! (process name)

DHCP server not found.

dhcpcd start.

Problem and solutions

Communication via Bluetooth is unavailable because btd is disabled in the security mode.

Enable the btd in the security mode.

Communication via parallel connection is unavailable because centrod is disabled in the security mode.

Enable centrod in the security mode.

The network service failed to start. Turn the printer off and then on. If this does not work, contact your service or sales representative.

The IP address was successfully received from the DHCP server.

Connected DHCP Server(<DHCP server address>).

connection from <IP address> Login was from the host IP address.

Could not attach to FileServer<error number> (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the file server has not been established. The file server has refused the connection. Check the file server configuration.

Could not attach to PServer<print server> (In the remote printer mode) Connection to the print server has not been established. The print server has refused the connection. Check the print server configuration.

Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps

Current IP address <current IP address>

Speed of the network (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps)

The IP address <current IP address> was received from the dhcp server.

Current IPX address<IPX address>

DHCP lease time expired.

Current ipx address

DHCP lease time has expired. The printer tries to discover the DHCP server again. The IP address until now becomes invalid.

The DHCP server was not found. Make sure that the DHCP is on the network.

The DHCPCD service (dhcp client service) has started.

dpsd is disabled.

Duplicate IP=<IP address>(from <MAC address>).

Established SPX Connection with PServer,(RPSocket=<socket number>, connID=<connection ID>)

PictBridge cannot be used when connected to the digital camera because Pictbridge is disabled in the security mode.

Enable PictBridge in the security mode.

The same IP address is used. Each IP address must be unique. Check the address of the device indicated in [MAC address].

(In the remote printer mode) Connection to the print server has been established.

264

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message exiting

Exit pserver

Frametype =<frame type name> httpd start.

inetd start.

IPP cancel-job: permission denied.

ipp disable.

ipp enable.

IPP job canceled. jobid=%d.

LeaseTime=<lease time>(sec), Renew-

Time=<renew time>(sec).

Login to fileserver <file server name>

(<IPX|IP>,<NDS|BINDERY>)

Memory allocate error.

nwstart start. (NetWare)

Open log file <file name>

Problem and solutions

The lpd service has ended and the system is exiting the process.

(In the print server mode) The print server function is disabled because the necessary print server settings have not been made.

The frame type name is configured to be used on NetWare.

The httpd service has started.

The inetd service has started.

The printer could not authenticate the name of the user attempting to cancel a job.

Printing with ipp is disabled.

Printing with ipp is enabled.

The spooled job was canceled due to error or user request.

The resource lease time received from the

DHCP server is displayed in [lease time] in seconds. The renewal time is displayed in [renew time] in seconds.

(In the print server mode) Login to the file server is in the NDS or BINDERY mode.

Data cannot be obtained.

Disconnect the USB cable, and then connect it.

Name registration of <WINS server sddress> was successful.

Name registration success. WINS Server=<WINS server sddress> NetBIOS

Name=<NetBIOS name>

Name registration success in Broadcast name=<NetBIOS name>

Name registration failed. name=<NetBIOS name> nbtd start.

npriter start. (NetWare) papd start. (AppleTalk)

Name registration by Broadcast name of <Net-

BIOS name> was successful.

Name registration of <NetBIOS name> failed.

Set unique NetBIOS name.

The nbtd service has started.

(In the remote printer mode) The NetWare service has started.

The service for NetWare protocol stack setting has started.

(In the print server mode) The specified log file has been opened.

The AppleTalk print service has started.

265

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message Problem and solutions phy release file open failed.

Print queue <print queue name> cannot be serviced by printer 0, <print server name>

Replacing the network interface board is required. Contact your sales or service representative.

(In the print server mode) The print queue cannot be established. Make sure that print queue exists on the specified file server.

Print server <print server name>has no printer. (In the print server mode) The printer is not assigned to the print server. Using NWadmin, assign the printer, and then restart it.

print sessions full

Printer <printer name> has no queue

No more print jobs can be accepted.

(In the print server mode) The print queue is not assigned to the printer. Using NWadmin, assign the print queue to the printer, and then restart it.

pserver start. (NetWare) (In the print server mode) The NetWare service has started.

Required file server (<file server name>) not found restarted.

The required file server is not found.

sap enable, saptype=<SAP type>, sapname=<SAP name>

The lpd service has started.

The SAP function has started. The SAP packet is issued to advertise the service on the SAP table on the NetWare server.

session <community name> already defined.

The requested community name is not defined.

session_ipx <community name> not defined.

The requested community name is not defined.

Set context to <NDS context name> shutdown signal received. network service rebooting...

An NDS context name has been set.

The network service is rebooting.

smbd started. (NetBIOS) smbd (Aerver Message Block Daemon) has started.

SMTPC: failed to get smtp server ip-address.

The SMTP server IP address could not be obtained. This could be because:

• The specified DNS server could not be found.

• No connection to the network has been established.

• The specified DNS server could not be found.

• An incorrect DNS server is specified.

• The specified SMTP server IP address could not be found in the DNS server.

266

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message

SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server. timeout.

SMTPC: refused connect by smtp server.

SMTPC: no smtp server. connection close.

SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server.

SMTPC: username or password wasn’t correct. [response code] (information)

Problem and solutions

Connection to the SMTP server failed due to timeout. This could be because:

• The specified SMTP server name is incorrect.

• No connection to the network has been established.

• The network configuration is incorrect, so there is no response from the SMTP server.

Connection to the SMTP server is denied. This could be because:

• A server other than the SMTP server has been specified.

• The specified SMTP server port number is incorrect.

Connection to the SMTP server failed due to no response from SMTP. This could be because:

• A server other than the SMTP server has been specified.

• The specified SMTP server port number is incorrect.

Connection to the SMTP server failed. This could be because:

• No connection to the network has been established.

• The network configuration is incorrect, so there is no response from the SMTP server.

• The specified SMTP server name is incorrect.

• An incorrect SMTP server is specified.

• The specified SMTP server IP address could not be found in the DNS server.

• A server other than the SMTP server has been specified.

• The specified SMTP server port number is incorrect.

Connection to the SMTP server failed. This could be because:

• The specified SMTP user name is incorrect.

• The specified SMTP password is incorrect.

Check the SMTP user name and password.

267

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Message

Snmp over ip is ready.

Snmp over IP over 1394 is ready.

Snmp over ipx is ready.

account is unavailable:

Same account name be used.

account is unavailable:

The authentication password is not set up.

account is unavailable: encryption is impossible.

trap account is unavailable.

Problem and solutions

Communication over TCP/IP with snmp is available.

Communication over IP over 1394 with snmp is available.

Communication over IPX with snmp is available.

User account is disabled. This could be because it use the same account name as the administrator account.

User account is disabled. This could be because the authentication password is not set, and only the encryption account is set.

Encryption is not possible and account is disabled. This could be because:

• Security option is not installed.

• Encryption password has not been specified.

v3Trap cannot be sent. This could be because the Trap destination account is different from the account specified by the printer.

snmpd start.

started.

Started.

Terminated.

The snmpd service has started.

The direct print service has started.

The rendezvous function is enabled.

The rendezvous function is disabled.

The print server received error <error number> during attempt to log in to the network. Access to the network was denied. Verify that the print server name and password are correct.

Login to the file server failed. The print server is not registered or a password is specified.

Register the print server without specifying a password.

usbd is disabled.

WINS wrong scopeID=<scope ID>

Plug and Play function and printing is disabled because usbd is disabled in the security mode.

Enable usbd in the security mode.

The scope ID is incorrect.

Specify the correct scope ID.

WINS name registration: No response to server(WINS server sddress)

There was no response to the registration request from the server. Check that the WINS server address is correct and the WINS server is working properly.

For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.

For details about “syslog” command, see

p.241 “syslog” .

268

Using a Printer Server

Preparing Printer Server

This section explains how to configure the printer as a Windows network printer.

The printer is configured to enabling network clients to use it. When the network printer is connected via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you can set the printing notification function to notify clients of the results of their print jobs.

Under Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional, or Windows Server 2003, to change printer properties in the [ Printer ] folder, you need Printer Management access authentication; under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an Administrator or member of the

PowerUsers group.

A

Open the [ Printers ] window from the [ Start ] menu.

The [ Printers ] window appears.

B

Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [ File ] menu, click

[ Properties ]. The printer properties appear.

C

On the [ Sharing ] tab, click [ Shared as: ].

D

To share the printer with users using a different version of Windows, click [ Additional Drivers...

].

If you have installed an alternative driver by selecting [ Shared as: ] during the printer driver installation, this step can be ignored.

E

Click [ OK ]. Close the printer properties.

Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

Follow the procedure below to configure the printer to use the printing notification function of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

Setting the print server

Under Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional, or Windows Server 2000, to change printer properties in the [ Printer ] folder, you need Printer Management access authentication; under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an Administrator or member of the

PowerUsers group.

A

From the [ Start ] button on the task bar, point to [ Program ], point to [ Smart-

DeviceMonitor for Client ], and then click [ Print Server Setting ].

G1307502_1.00

Copyright © 2005

269

Using a Printer Server

The print server setting dialog box appears.

B

Select the [ Notify Client of Printing ] check box, and click [ OK ].

After print server setting is made, a dialog box appears. Confirm the dialog box content, and click [ OK ] .

Click [ Cancel ] to interrupt the procedure.

C

A dialog box appears for client setting. Click [ OK ].

The print server setting is complete. Each client must be set to receive print notification.

Current printing jobs restart from the beginning after the spooler pauses briefly.

When the expansion function is not used, the function is automatically set as available.

Setting a Client

A

From the [ Start ] button on the task bar, point to [ Program ], point to [ Smart-

DeviceMonitor for Client ], and then click [ Setting Expansion Function ].

A dialog box for setting the expansion function appears.

B

Select the [ Use the expansion function ] check box in [ Notify Printing ].

C

Select the [ Notify when using the print server ] check box.

D

Click [ OK ].

The dialog box for setting the expansion function closes. The client setting is completed.

Set the printing notification function on the printer driver as well as on

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

270

Using a Printer Server

Using NetWare

This section describes the setting procedure for network printers in the NetWare environment. In the NetWare environment, you can connect the printer as a

“print server” or “remote printer”.

Setting procedure

• When using the printer as a print server

A

B

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

Setting the network interface board.

C Turning the printer off and then back on.

• When using the printer as a remote printer

A

B

Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.

Setting the network interface board.

C

D

Setting NetWare.

Starting the print server.

Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

To use the printer in a NetWare environment, use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin to set the NetWare printing environment.

The NetWare Client provided by Novell is required to set the printing environment using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin under the following environments:

• NDS mode in Windows 95/98/Me

• NDS or Bindery mode in Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0

For details about installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see

p.200 “Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”

.

Printers listed by SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin lists printers connected to the network. If you cannot identify the printer you want to configure, print configuration page, and then check the printer name.

Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x)

Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server using Net-

Ware 3.x.

A

Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.

271

Using a Printer Server

B

Start NIB Setup Tool from the [ Start ] menu.

C

Click [ Wizard ], and then click [ OK ].

D

Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [ Finish ].

A dialog box prompting you will need to perform the remaining configuration tasks in the Web browser appears. Click [ OK ] , and then wait until Web Image

Monitor starts automatically.

E

The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

Enter the user name and password, and then click OK.

For details about the password, consult your network administrator.

F

Click [ Configuration ] in the left area, click [ Network ], and then click [ NetWare ].

The following items are displayed:

• Print Server Name: Enter the NetWare print server name. If you want to use the interface board as a print server, enter the name of a print server that is not active on the file server. 1 to 47 characters can be used.

• Logon Mode: Specify whether you will designate a file server or NDS tree when logging on to NetWare.

• File Server Name: When a file server name is entered here, only the specified file server is searched for. This item is mandatory. Up to 47 characters can be used.

• NDS Tree: If you want to enable the NDS mode, enter the name of the NDS tree you want to log on to using up to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters.

• NDS Context Name: If you want to enable the NDS mode, enter the print server context using up to 127 characters.

• Operation mode: Specify whether to use the interface board as a print server or a remote printer.

• Remote printer number: This item is effective when you have specified that the interface board be used as a remote printer. Enter the same number as the number of the printer to be created on the print server, using 0 to 254 one-byte characters.

• Job Timeout: When the interface board is running as a NetWare remote printer, the printer cannot judge when a print job ends. Therefore, the printer terminates printing when a certain period of time has elapsed since the last time it has received print data (i.e., when it has not received print data for a certain period of time). Specify here this period of time (3 to 255 seconds) using one-byte characters. The initial value is 15 (seconds).

• Frame Type: Select the frame type to be used from the drop-down menu.

• Print Server Protocol: Select the protocol to be used for NetWare from the drop-down menu.

272

Using a Printer Server

• NCP Distribution Protocol: Select the protocol to be used for NCP distribution.

G

Confirm the settings, and then click [ Apply ].

Configuration is now complete. Wait for several minutes if you want to restart

Web Image Monitor.

H

To check that the configuration is made correctly, enter the following from the command prompt.

F:> USERLIST

If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as a connected user.

If you cannot identify the printer you want to configure, check the printer name with the configuration page printed from the printer. For details about

printing a configuration page, see p.161 “Printing a Configuration Page” .

If no printer names appear in the list, match the frame types of IPX/SPXs for the computer and printer. Use the [ Network ] dialog box of Windows to change the frame type of the computer.

For details about changing the printer's frame type (“NW Frame Type”), see “Configuring the Printer”, Setup Guide.

Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5)

Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server using Net-

Ware 4.x, NetWare 5/5.1, or NetWare 6.0.

When using the printer as a print server in NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5/5.1, or

NetWare 6.0, set it to the NDS mode.

When using NetWare 5/5.1 or NetWare 6.0, set the printer as a print server.

A

Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.

B

Start NIB Setup Tool on the [ Start ] menu.

C

Click [ Wizard ], and then click [ OK ].

D

Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [ Finish ].

A dialog box prompting you to perform the remaining configuration tasks in the

Web browser appears. Click [ OK ] , and then wait until Web Image Monitor starts automatically.

E

A dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

Enter the user name and password, and then click OK.

273

Using a Printer Server

For details about passwords, consult your network administrator.

F

Click [ Configuration ] in the left area, click [ Network ], and then click [ NetWare ].

The following items are displayed:

• Print Server Name: Enter the NetWare print server name. To use the interface board as a print server, enter the name of a print server that is not active on the file server. Use up to 47 single byte characters.

• Logon Mode: Specify whether to designate a file server or NDS tree when logging on to NetWare.

• File Server Name: When a file server name is entered here, only the specified file server is searched for. This item is mandatory. Use up to 47 single byte characters.

• NDS Tree: If you want to enable NDS mode, enter the name of the NDS tree you want to log on to. Use up to 32 single byte alphanumeric characters.

• NDS Context Name: If you want to enable NDS mode, enter the print server context using up to 127 characters.

• Operation mode: Specify whether to use the interface board as a print server or a remote printer.

• Remote printer number: This item is effective when you have specified that the interface board be used as a remote printer. Enter the same number as the number of the printer to be created on the print server, using 0 to 254 one-byte characters.

• Job Timeout: When the interface board is running as a NetWare remote printer, the printer cannot judge when a print job ends. Therefore, the printer terminates printing when a certain period of time has elapsed since it received print data (i.e., when it has not received print data for a certain period of time). Specify this period of time (3 to 255 seconds) using single byte characters. The default value is 15 (seconds).

• Frame Type: Select the frame type from the drop-down menu.

• Print Server Protocol: Select the protocol for NetWare from the drop-down menu.

• NCP Distribution Protocol: Select the protocol for NCP distribution.

G

Confirm the settings, and then click [ Apply ].

Configuration is now complete. Wait for several minutes if you want to restart

Web Image Monitor.

H

To check that the configuration is made correctly, enter the following from the command prompt.

F:> NLIST USER /A/B

274

Using a Printer Server

If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as a connected user.

If you cannot identify the printer you want to configure, check the printer name with the configuration page printed from the printer. For details about

printing a configuration page, see p.161 “Printing a Configuration Page” .

If no printer names appear in the list, match the frame types of IPX/SPXs for the computer and printer. Use the [ Network ] dialog box of Windows to change the frame type of the computer.

For details about changing the printer's frame type (“NW Frame Type”), see “Configuring the Printer”, Setup Guide.

When using the printer in a pure IP environment of NetWare 5/5.1 or Net-

Ware 6.0/6.5, see p.275 “Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 or 6/6.5 Environment” .

Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 or 6/6.5 Environment

Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server in a pure IP environment of NetWare 5/5.1.

When creating a queued print server in a pure IP environment of NetWare

5/5.1 or NetWare 6.0, create a print queue on the file server using NetWare

Administrator.

This printer is not available as a remote printer for use in a pure IP environment.

To use the printer in a pure IP environment, set it to TCP/IP.

Setting up using NIB Setup Tool

A

Log on to the file server as an administrator or administrator equivalent.

B

Start NIB Setup Tool on the [ Start ] menu.

C

Click [ Property Sheet ], and then click [ OK ].

D

Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [ Finish ].

A dialog box prompting you to perform the remaining configuration tasks in the

Web browser appears. Click [ OK ] , and then wait until Web Image Monitor starts automatically.

E

A dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

Enter the user name and password, and then click OK.

275

Using a Printer Server

For details about the passwords, consult your network administrator.

F

Click [ Configuration ] in the left area, click [ Network ], and then click [ NetWare ].

The following items are displayed:

• Print Server Name: Enter the NetWare print server name. To use the interface board as a print server, enter the name of a print server that is not active on the file server. Use up to 47 single byte characters.

• Logon Mode: Specify whether to designate a file server or NDS tree when logging on to NetWare.

• File Server Name: When a file server name is entered here, only the specified file server is searched for. This item is mandatory. Use up to 47 single byte characters.

• NDS Tree: To enable NDS mode, enter the name of the NDS tree you want to log on to. Use up to 32 single byte alphanumeric characters.

• NDS Context Name: To enable NDS mode, enter the print server context.

Use up to 127 single byte characters.

• Operation mode: Specify whether to use the interface board as a print server or a remote printer.

• Remote printer number: This item is effective if you have selected to use the interface board as a remote printer. Enter the same number as the number of the printer to be created on the print server. Use 0 to 254 single byte characters.

• Job Timeout: When the interface board is running as a NetWare remote printer, the printer cannot judge when a print job ends. Therefore, the printer terminates printing when a certain period of time has elapsed since it received print data (i.e., when it has not received print data for a certain period of time). Specify this period of time (3 to 255 seconds) single byte characters. The default value is 15 (seconds).

• Frame Type: Select the frame type from the drop-down menu.

• Print Server Protocol: Select the protocol for NetWare from the drop-down menu.

• NCP Distribution Protocol: Select the protocol for NCP distribution.

G

Confirm the settings, and then click [ Apply ].

Configuration is now complete. Wait for several minutes if you want to restart

Web Image Monitor.

Setting up using NWadmin

A

From Windows, start NWadmin.

For details about NWadmin, see the NetWare manuals.

276

Using a Printer Server

B

Select the object in which the print queue is located in the directory tree, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

C

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Print Queue ], and then click [ OK ].

D

In the [ Print Queue Name ] box, enter the name of the print queue.

E

In the [ Print Queue Volume ] box, click [ Browse ].

F

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the volume in which the print queue is created, and then click [ OK ].

G

Check the settings, and then click [ Create ].

H

Select the object in which the printer is located, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

I

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Printer ], and then click [ OK ]. For Net-

Ware 5, click [ Printer (Non NDPS) ].

J

In the [ Printer name ] box, enter the printer name

K

Select the [ Define additional properties ] check box, and then click [ Create ].

L

Click [ Assignments ], and then click [ Add ] in the [ Assignments ] area.

M

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the queue you, and then click [ OK ].

N

Click [ Configuration ], click [ Parallel ] in the [ Printer type ] list, and then click

[ Communication ].

O

Click [ Manual load ] in the [ Communication type ] area, and then click [ OK ].

P

Check the settings, and then click [ OK ].

Q

Select a context specified using NIB Setup Tool, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

R

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Print Server ], and then click [ OK ]. For

NetWare 5, click [ Print Sever (Non NDPS) ].

S

In the [ Print Server Name ] box, enter the print server name.

Use the same print server name specified using NIB Setup Tool.

T

Select the [ Define additional properties ] check box, and then click [ Create ].

U

Click [ Assignments ], and then click [ Add ] in the [ Assignments ] area.

V

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the queue you created, and then click

[ OK ].

W

Check the settings, and then click [ OK ].

277

Using a Printer Server

X

Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the

NetWare server.

If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.

To exit

CAREE: unload pserver

To start

CAREE: load pserver print_server_name

Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x)

Follow the procedure below to use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare

3.x.

Setting up using NIB Setup Tool

A

Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.

B

Start NIB Setup Tool from [ Start ] menu.

C

Click [ Property Sheet ], and then click [ OK ].

D

Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [ Finish ].

A dialog box prompting you to perform the remaining configuration tasks in the

Web browser appears. Click [ OK ] , and then wait until Web Image Monitor starts automatically.

E

A dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

Enter the user name and password, and then click OK.

For details about passwords, consult your network administrator.

F

Click [ Configuration ] in the left area, click [ Network ], and then click [ NetWare ].

The following items are displayed:

• Print Server Name: Enter the NetWare print server name. To use the interface board as a print server, enter the name of a print server that is not active on the file server. Use up to 47 single byte characters.

• Logon Mode: Specify whether to designate a file server or NDS tree when logging on to NetWare.

• File Server Name: When a file server name is entered here, only the specified file server is searched for. This item is mandatory. Use up to 47 single byte characters.

278

Using a Printer Server

• NDS Tree: To enable the NDS mode, enter the name of the NDS tree you want to log on to. Use up to 32 single byte alphanumeric characters.

• NDS Context Name: To enable the NDS mode, enter the print server context. Use up to 127 single byte characters.

• Operation mode: Specify whether to use the interface board as a print server or a remote printer.

• Remote printer number: This item is effective if you have selected to use the interface board as a remote printer. Enter the same number as the number of the printer to be created on the print server. Use 0 to 254 single byte characters.

• Job Timeout: When the interface board is running as a NetWare remote printer, the printer cannot judge when a print job ends. Therefore, the printer terminates printing when a certain period of time has elapsed since it received print data (i.e., when it has not received print data for a certain period of time). Specify this period of time (3 to 255 seconds). Use single byte characters. The default value is 15 (seconds).

• Frame Type: Select the frame type from the drop-down menu.

• Print Server Protocol: Select the protocol for NetWare from the drop-down menu.

• NCP Distribution Protocol: Select the protocol for NCP distribution.

G

Confirm the settings, and then click [ Apply ].

Configuration is now complete. Wait for several minutes if you want to restart

Web Image Monitor.

Setting up using PCONSOLE

A

Enter “PCONSOLE” from the command prompt.

F:> PCONSOLE

B

Create a print queue.

When using the existing print queue, go to the procedure for creating a printer.

C

From the [ Available Options ] menu, select [ Print Queue Information ], and then press the { Enter } key.

D

Press { Insert } key, and then enter a print queue name.

E

Press { Esc } key to return to the [ Available Options ] menu.

F

Set up the network connection to a printer.

G

On the [ Available Options ] menu, click [ Print Server Information ], and then press the { Enter } key.

279

Using a Printer Server

H

To create a new print server, press the { Insert } key, and then enter a print server name.

For a currently defined print server, select a print server in the [ Print Server ] list.

Use the same printer name specified using NIB Setup Tool.

I

From the [ Print Server Information ] menu, select [ Print Server Configuration ].

J

From the [ Print Server Configuration ] menu, select [ Printer Configuration ].

K

Select the printer indicated as [ Not Installed ].

Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number using

NIB Setup Tool.

L

To change the printer name, enter a new name.

A name “Printer x” is assigned to the printer. The “x” stands for the number of the selected printer.

M

As type, select [ Remote Parallel, LPT1 ].

The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automatically configured.

N

Press the { Esc } key, and then click [ Yes ] on the confirmation message.

O

Press the { Esc } key to return to [ Print Server Configuration Menu ].

P

Assign print queues to the created printer.

Q

From [ Print Server Configuration Menu ], select [ Queues Serviced By Printer ].

R

Select the printer created.

S

Press the { Insert } key to select a queue serviced by the printer.

You can select several queues.

T

Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.

Following these steps, check that the queues are assigned.

U

Press the { Esc } key until “Exit?” appears, and then select [ Yes ] to exit

PCONSOLE.

V

Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the

NetWare server.

If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.

To quit

CAREE: unload pserver

280

Using a Printer Server

To start

CAREE: load pserver print_server_name

If the printer works as configured, the message “Waiting for job” appears.

Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5)

Follow the procedure below to use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare

4.x, 5/5.1 and 6.

To use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare 4.x/5/5.1, set it to NDS mode.

Do not use the printer as a remote printer when Pure IP is used.

Setting up using NIB Setup Tool

A

Log on to the file server as an administrator or administrator equivalent.

B

StartNIB Setup Tool from [ Start ] menu.

C

Click [ Property Sheet ], and then click [ OK ].

D

Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [ Finish ].

A dialog box prompting you to perform the remaining configuration tasks in the

Web browser appears. Click [ OK ] , and then wait until Web Image Monitor starts automatically.

E

A dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

Enter the user name and password, and then click OK.

For details about passwords, consult your network administrator.

F

Click [ Configuration ] in the left area, click [ Network ], and then click [ NetWare ].

The following items are displayed:

• Print Server Name: Enter the NetWare print server name. To use the interface board as a print server, enter the name of a print server that is not active on the file server. Use up to 47 single byte characters.

• Logon Mode: Specify whether to designate a file server or NDS tree when logging on to NetWare.

• File Server Name: When a file server name is entered here, only the specified file server is searched for. This item is mandatory. Use up to 47 single byte characters.

281

Using a Printer Server

• NDS Tree: To enable NDS mode, enter the name of the NDS tree you want to log on to. Use up to 32 single byte alphanumeric characters.

• NDS Context Name: To enable NDS mode, enter the print server context.

Use up to 127 single byte characters.

• Operation mode: Specify whether to use the interface board as a print server or a remote printer.

• Remote printer number: This item is effective if you have selected to use the interface board be used as a remote printer. Enter the same number as the number of the printer to be created on the print server. Use 0 to 254 single byte characters.

• Job Timeout: When the interface board is running as a NetWare remote printer, the printer cannot judge when a print job ends. Therefore, the printer terminates printing when a certain period of time has elapsed since it received print data (i.e., when it has not received print data for a certain period of time). Specify this period of time (3 to 255 seconds). Use single byte characters. The default value is 15 (seconds).

• Frame Type: Select the frame type from the drop-down menu.

• Print Server Protocol: Select the protocol for NetWare from the drop-down menu.

• NCP Distribution Protocol: Select the protocol for NCP distribution.

G

Confirm the settings, and then click [ Apply ].

Configuration is now complete. Wait for several minutes if you want to restart

Web Image Monitor.

Setting up using NWadmin

A

From Windows, start NWadmin.

For details about NWadmin, see the NetWare manuals.

B

Set up the network connection to a print queue. Select the object in which the print queue is located in the directory tree, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

C

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Print Queue ], and then click [ OK ].

D

In the [ Print Queue Name ] box, enter the name of the print queue.

E

In the [ Print Queue Volume ] box, click [ Browse ].

F

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the volume in which the print queue is created, and then click [ OK ].

G

Check the settings, and then click [ Create ].

282

Using a Printer Server

H

Set up the network connection to a printer. Select the object in which the printer is located, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

I

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Printer ], and then click [ OK ]. For Net-

Ware 5, click [ Printer (Non NDPS) ].

J

In the [ Printer name ] box, enter the printer name

K

Select the [ Define additional properties ] check box, and then click [ Create ].

L

Assign print queues to the created printer. Click [ Assignments ], and then click [ Add ] in the [ Assignments ] area.

M

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the queue you created, and then click

[ OK ].

N

Click [ Configuration ], click [ Parallel ] in the [ Printer type ] list, and then click

[ Communication ].

O

Click [ Manual load ] in the [ Communication type ] area, and then click [ OK ].

Check the settings, and then click [ OK ].

P

Set up the network connection to a print server. Select a context specified using NIB Setup Tool, and then click [ Create ] on the [ Object ] menu.

Q

In the [ Class of new object ] box, click [ Print Server ], and then click [ OK ]. For

NetWare 5, click [ Print Sever (Non NDPS) ].

R

In the [ Print Server Name ] box, enter the print server name.

Use the same print server name specified using NIB Setup Tool.

S

Select the [ Define additional properties ] check box, and then click [ Create ].

T

Assign the printer to the created print server. Click [ Assignments ], and then click [ Add ] in the [ Assignments ] area.

U

In the [ Available objects ] box, click the queue you created, and then click

[ OK ].

V

In the [ Printers ] area, click the printer you assigned, and then click [ Printer

Number ]

W

Enter the printer number, and then click [ OK ]. Check the settings, and then click [ OK ].

Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number using

NIB Setup Tool.

X

Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the

NetWare server.

If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.

283

Using a Printer Server

To exit

CAREE: unload pserver

To start

CAREE: load pserver print_server_name

284

Special Operations under Windows

Printing Files Directly from Windows

You can print files directly using Windows commands. For example, you can print PostScript files for PostScript 3.

Windows 95/98/Me

You can print files directly using “ftp” command.

Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0

You can print files directly using “lpr”, “rcp” or “ftp” command.

Setup

Follow the procedure below to make network environment settings.

A

Enable TCP/IP with the control panel, and then set up the printer’s network environment about TCP/IP including IP addresses.

TCP/IP of the printer is set as default.

B

Install a TCP/IP in Windows to set up the network environment.

Consult the network administrator for the local setting information.

C

To print under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT

4.0, install “Printing service for UNIX” as the network application. To print under Windows NT 4.0, install “Microsoft TCP/IP printing” as the network application.

For details about setting up IP address, see Setup Guide.

For details about setting the IP address of the printer using DHCP, see

p.319 “Using DHCP” .

This completes the setup for specifying a printer using an IP address when

printing. When using a host name to specify a printer, proceed to p.285

“Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address”

and continue the setup.

Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address

When a host name is defined, you can specify a printer by host name instead of

IP address. The host names vary depending on the network environment.

When using DNS

Use the host name set to the data file on the DNS server.

G1307502_1.00

Copyright © 2005

285

Special Operations under Windows

When setting the IP address of a printer using DHCP

Use the printer name on the configuration page as the host name.

For details about printing a configuration page, see p.161 “Printing a Configuration Page” .

In other cases

Add the IP address and host name of the network printer to the hosts file on the computer used for printing. Methods of addition vary depending on operating systems.

Windows 95/98/Me

A

Copy \WINDOWS\HOSTS.SAM to the same directory and name it

“HOSTS” with no extension.

B

Open the “\WINDOWS\HOSTS” file created using memo pad files, for instance.

C

Add an IP address and host name to the hosts file using the following format:

192.168.15.16 host # NP

”192.168.15.16” is the IP address, “host” is the printer's host name, and “#NP” is replaced by comments. Insert a space or tab between “192.168.15.16” and

“host”, between “host” and “#NP” respectively, using one line for this format.

D

Save the file.

Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0

A

Open the hosts file using memo pad files, for instance.

The hosts file is in the following folder:

\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC\HOSTS

”\WINNT” is the directory of the installation destination for Windows 2000/XP,

Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.

B

Add an IP address and host name to the hosts file using the following format:

192.168.15.16 host # NP

”192.168.15.16” is the IP address, “host” is the printer's host name, and “#NP” is replaced by comments. Insert a space or tab between “192.168.15.16” and

“host”, between “host” and “#NP” respectively, using one line for this format.

286

Special Operations under Windows

C

Save the file.

Printing Commands

The following explains printing operations using the “lpr”, “rcp”, and “ftp” commands.

Enter commands using the command prompt window. The location of the command prompts varies depending on operating systems:

• Windows 95/98

[ Start ] - [ Programs ] - [ MS-DOS Prompt ]

• Windows Me

[ Start ] - [ Programs ] - [ Accessories ] - [ MS-DOS Prompt ]

• Windows 2000

[ Start ] - [ Programs ] - [ Accessories ] - [ Command Prompt ]

• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003

[ Start ] - [ All Programs ] - [ Accessories ] - [ Command Prompt ]

• Windows NT 4.0

[ Start ] - [ Programs ] - [ Command Prompt ]

Match the data format of the file to be printed with the emulation mode of the printer.

If the message “print requests full” appears, no print jobs can be accepted. Try again when sessions end. For each command, the amount of possible sessions is indicated as follows:

• lpr: 5(When the spool printing function is available: 10)

• rcp, rsh: 5

• ftp: 3

Enter the file name in a format including the path from the directory executing commands.

lpr

The “option” specified in a command is an intrinsic printer option and its syntax is similar to printing from UNIX. For details, see UNIX Supplement.

When specifying a printer by IP address

c:> lpr -Sprinter's IP address [-Poption] [-ol] \pass name\file name

287

Special Operations under Windows

When using a host name instead of an IP address

c:> lpr -Sprinter's host name [-Poption] [-ol] \pass name\file name

When printing a binary file, add the “-ol” option (lowercase O, and lowercase

L).

When using a printer with the host name “host” to print a PostScript file named

“file 1” located in the “C:\PRINT” directory, the command line is as follows: c:> lpr -Shost -Pfiletype=RPS -ol C:\PRINT\file1

rcp

First, register the printer's host name in the hosts file.

c:> rcp [-b] \pass name\file name [pass name\file name...] printer's host name:[option]

In file names, “*” and “?” can be used as wild cards.

When printing a binary file, add the “-b” option.

When using a printer with the host name “host” to print a PostScript file named

“file 1” or “file 2” located in the “C:\PRINT” directory, the command line is as follows: c:> rcp -b C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2 host:filetype=RPS

For details about registering the printer's host name in the hosts file, see

p.285 “Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address” .

ftp

Use the “put” or “mput” command according to the number of files to be printed.

When one file is printed

ftp> put \pass name\file name [option]

When multiple files are printed

ftp> mput \pass name\file name [\pass name\file name...]

[option]

Follow the procedure below to print using the “ftp” command.

A

Formulate the printer's IP address or the host name of the hosts file printer as an argument and use the “ftp” command.

% ftp printer's IP address

B

Enter the user name and password, and then press the { # Enter } key.

There is no default user name while “password” is the default password.

288

Special Operations under Windows

User:

Password:

C

When printing a binary file, set the file mode to binary.

ftp> bin

When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.

D

Specify files to be printed.

The following shows the examples of printing a PostScript file named “file 1” in the “C:\PRINT” directory and printing file 1 and file 2.

ftp> put C:\PRINT\file1 filetype=RPS ftp> mput C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2

E

Quit ftp.

ftp> bye

“=”, “,”, “_”, and “;”cannot be used for filenames. File names will be read as option strings.

For “mput” command, option can not be defined.

For “mput” command, “*” and “?” can be used as wild cards in file names.

When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.

289

Mac OS Configuration

Mac OS

This section explains how to configure a Mac OS to use EtherTalk and USB.

The following explains how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are not using Mac

OS 9.1, see the manual of the Mac OS you are using for details

For Mac OS 8.6 and higher. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)

The PostScript 3 printer driver is stored in the following folder on the CD-

ROM.

Mac OS 8 and 9:PS Driver:(language):Disk1

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File

It is necessary to install a printer driver and PPD files to print from a Mac OS.

Follow the procedure below to install a printer driver and a PPD file into a Mac

OS using Mac OS 8.6 and higher.

PostScript 3 Printer Driver

A

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

B

Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

C

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

D

Double-click the [ PS Driver ] folder.

E

Double-click the folder of the language you use.

F

Open [ DISK1 ], and then double-click the installer icon.

G

Follow the instructions on the screen.

PPD Files

A

Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

B

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

C

Double-click the [ Printer Descriptions ] folder.

D

Double-click the folder of the language you use.

G1307502_1.00

Copyright © 2005

290

Mac OS Configuration

E

Open the [ DISK1 ] folder.

F

Drag the PPD file and the plugin file into [ Printer Descriptions ] in [ Extensions ] under [ System Folder ].

G

Restart the Mac OS.

Setting Up PPD Files

Make sure that the printers are connected to an AppleTalk network before performing the following procedure.

A

On the [ Apple ] menu, click [ Chooser ].

B

Click the Adobe PS icon.

C

In the [ Select a PostScript Printer: ] list, click the name of the printer you want to use.

D

Click [ Create ].

E

Click the printer you want to use, and then click [ Select ].

A PPD file is set up and the Adobe PS icon appears at the left of the printer name in the list. Follow the procedure on

p.292 “Setting Up Options” to make

option settings; otherwise close the [ Chooser ] dialog box.

Creating a Desktop Printer Icon

Make sure that printers are connected to the USB before performing the following procedure.

To use a printer connected by USB, create a desktop printer icon.

A

Double-click [ Desktop Printer Utility ] in the [ AdobePS Components ] folder.

B

Click [ AdobePS ] in [ With: ], click [ Printer (USB) ] in [ Create Desktop ], and then click [ OK ].

C

Click [ Change ] in [ USB Printer Selection ].

D

Select the model you are using in [ Select a USB Printer: ], and then click [ OK ].

E

Click [ Auto Setup ] in [ PostScript TM Printer Description (PPD) File ].

F

Click [ Create ].

G

Enter the printer name, and then click [ Save ].

291

Mac OS Configuration

The printer icon appears on the desktop.

H

Quit Desktop Printer Utility.

Setting Up Options

A

On the [ Apple ] menu, click [ Chooser ].

B

Click the Adobe PS icon.

C

In the [ Select the PostScript Printer: ] list, click the name of the printer you want to use, and then click [ Setup ].

D

Click [ Configure ].

A list of options appears.

E

Select the option you want to set up, and then select an appropriate setting for it.

F

Click [ OK ].

The list of options closes.

G

Click [ OK ].

The [ Chooser ] dialog box appears.

H

Close the [ Chooser ] dialog box.

If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set up correctly. To complete the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.

Installing the ColorSync Profiles

ColorSync profiles enable a printer to print colors consistent with those on the computer display. You must install the ColorSync profile to use this function.

Follow the procedure below to install the ColorSync profiles.

A

Start a Mac OS.

B

Double-click the hard disk icon, and then open the appropriate folder for installing the ColorSync profiles.

The location of the appropriate folder may vary depending on the version of the Mac OS. The following are examples:

• System: Preferences: ColorSync profiles

• System: ColorSync profiles

292

Mac OS Configuration

C

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM drive icon appears.

D

Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

The contents of the CD-ROM appear.

E

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

F

Double-click the [ ColorSync

TM

Profiles ] folder.

G

Drag the file to the [ ColorSync TM Profiles ] folder on the hard disk.

The ColorSync profiles are installed.

The ColorSync profiles are consistent with color characteristics defined by the International Color Consortium (ICC).

For some computer displays, particular settings need to be created by ColorSync. For details, see the appropriate manuals for your computer display.

Installing Adobe Type Manager

Quit all applications currently running before installation. Install ATM after you restart the computer.

A

Start a Mac OS.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

C

Double-click the CD-ROM drive con.

D

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

E

Double-click the [ ATM ] folder.

F

Double-click the ATM 4.6.3 installer icon.

G

Follow the instructions on the screen.

H

When the procedure is complete, restart the computer. ATM will be completely installed only after restarting.

I

On the [ Apple ] menu, open [ Control Panel ], and then click [ ~ATM ].

J

The ATM control panel opens.

293

Mac OS Configuration

For details about installation, see the operating instructions in the ATM folder.

Installing Screen fonts

Follow the procedure below to install screen fonts.

The screen fonts described below can be found in the [ Fonts ] folder on the CD-

ROM.

A

Start a Mac OS.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM drive icon appears.

C

Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

The contents of the CD-ROM appear.

D

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

E

Double-click the [ Fonts ] folder.

F

Double-click the [ Screen font ] folder.

G

Double-click the [ TrueType ] or [ Type1 ] folder.

Select the font type you want to use.

H

Copy the fonts you want to install in [ Fonts ] under [ System Folder ].

A confirmation message appears.

I

Click [ OK ].

The fonts are installed.

J

Restart the Mac OS.

Changing to EtherTalk

Follow the procedure below to configure to a Mac OS to use EtherTalk.

A

Open [ Control Panel ], and then double-click the AppleTalk icon.

B

On the [ Connect via: ] pop-up menu, click [ Ethernet ].

C

If you change zones, select a name on the [ Current zone: ] pop-up menu.

D

Close the AppleTalk control panel.

294

Mac OS Configuration

E

Restart the computer.

The procedures used to configure Mac OS may vary depending on the Mac

OS version. The following describes how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are using a different version of Mac OS, use the following procedures as a reference and see the manuals for your Mac OS version.

Confirm the Connection to the Printer with TCP/IP

For information about installing applications required for EtherTalk, see the

Mac OS manuals.

295

Mac OS Configuration

Mac OS X

This section explains how to configure a Mac OS X to use EtherTalk and USB.

Follow the procedure below to configure Mac OS X 10.1. If you are not using Mac

OS X 10.1, see the manual of the Mac OS X you are using for details.

For Mac OS X 10.1 or higher.

The PPD files are stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM.

Mac OS X:PPD Installer

Installing the PPD Files

Follow the procedure below to install a PPD file to print from Mac OS X.

You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network administrator.

A

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

B

Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.

C

Double-click the [ Mac OS X ] folder.

D

Double-click the installer icon.

E

Follow the instructions on the screen.

Setting Up the PPD File

A

Start Print Center.

B

Click [ Add Printer ].

Click [ AppleTalk ] on the first pop-up menu.

If the zone is set, select the zone from the second pop-up menu.

C

Select the PPD file for the model you are using from the [ Printer Model: ] pop-up menu, and then click [ Add ].

296

Mac OS Configuration

Setting Up Options

No printer option settings can be made under Mac OS X. No new settings for options not installed can be made.

Using USB Interface

Follow the procedure below to setup USB connection.

A

Start [ Print Setup Utility ].

B

Click [ Add ].

C

Click [ USB ] on the pop-up menu.

The connected printer appears.

D

Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [ Printer Model: ] pop-up menu.

A list of printer types appears.

E

Select the name of the connected printer from the list of printer models, and then click [ Add ].

F

Close the [ Printer List ] dialog box, and then quit [ Print Setup Utility ].

When printing via USB using a Macintosh computer, the printer language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on this printer to change the printer language to [ Auto Detect ] or [ PS ] before printing.

USB2.0 can be used only with Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher.

Using Rendezvous

Follow the procedure below to print using Rendezvous under Mac OS X 10.2.3

or higher. Ethernet and wireless LAN connections can also be used.

A

Start Print Center.

B

Click [ Add ].

C

Click [ Rendezvous ] on the pop-up menu.

The connected printer appears.

D

Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [ Printer Model: ] pop-up menu.

297

Mac OS Configuration

A list of printer types appears.

E

Select the name of the connected printer from the list of printer models, and then click [ Add ].

F

Close the [ Printer List ] dialog box, and then quit Print Center.

When printing with a Rendezvous connection to a Macintosh computer, printer language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on this printer to change printer language to [ Auto Detect ] or [ PS ] before printing.

Changing to EtherTalk

You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network administrator

Follow the procedure below to configure a Mac OS X to use EtherTalk.

For information about installing applications required for EtherTalk, see the

Mac OS manuals.

A

Open [ System Preference ], and then click the Network icon.

B

Click the [ AppleTalk ] tab.

C

Select the [ Make AppleTalk Active ] check box.

D

To change AppleTalk zones, select a name from the [ AppleTalk Zone: ] popup menu.

E

When the settings are made, click [ Apple Now ].

298

Mac OS Configuration

Configuring the Printer

Use the control panel to enable AppleTalk. (The default is active.)

299

Mac OS Configuration

Using PostScript 3

Job Type

You can select the type of print job.

If you use Mac OS X, this function is not available.

Normal

Select this for normal printing. The print job starts immediately after the print command is given.

Sample Print

Use this function to print the first set of a multiple-set print job. After checking the results, the remaining sets can be printed using the control panel. This function can protect you from printing a large quantity of misprints.

Locked Print

Use this function to print confidential documents. Documents will not be printed automatically unless a password is entered using the control panel.

Using Sample Print

To use this function, the hard disk must be installed on the printer.

The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the contents of the print images. At most, the printer can save 30 jobs or 1,000 pages for

Sample Print and Locked Print.

If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.

Sample Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been executed or deleted using the Web browser before you select “Sample

Print“ from the control panel.

Sample Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you select

[ Sample Print ] using the control panel will appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those Sample Print files.

If you use Mac OS X, Sample Print function cannot be used.

If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before sending a print job. By default, sample print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed.

A

In an application, select the menu command to print.

300

Mac OS Configuration

The print dialog box appears.

B

On the pop-up menu, click [ Job Log ].

C

In [ Job Type: ], click [ Sample Print ], and then select the appropriate setting.

D

In [ User ID: ], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-

9) characters.

Set this to identify the user associated with the job.

The user ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.

E

After making the necessary settings you want, click [ Print ].

The Sample Print job is sent to the printer and one set is printed.

F

Check the sample print to confirm that the settings are correct.

If the settings are correct, print the remaining sets.

If not, you can delete the saved job.

For details about printing the remaining sets, see

p.108 “Printing the Remaining Sets”

.

For details about deleting a Sample Print file, see

p.109 “Deleting a Sample

Print File”

.

Using Locked Print

To use this function, the hard disk must be installed on the printer.

The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the contents of the print images. At most, the printer can save 30 jobs or 1,000 pages for

Sample Print and Locked Print.

If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.

Locked Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already been printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor before you select [ Locked

Print ] using the control panel.

Locked Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you have selected [ Locked Print ] using the control panel will still appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those

Locked Print files.

If you use Mac OS X, Locked Print function cannot be used.

If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before sending a print job. By default, locked print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed.

301

Mac OS Configuration

Print jobs are not saved on the hard disk in the following cases. You can check the error log for jobs not saved.

• When there are 30 Sample Print and Locked Print jobs saved on the hard disk.

• When the total number of pages saved on the hard disk exceeds 1,000 pages.

A

In an application, select the menu command to print.

The print dialog box appears.

B

On the pop-up menu, click [ Job Log ].

C

In [ Job Type: ], click [ Locked Print ], and then select the appropriate setting.

D

In [ User ID: ], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-

9) characters, and then enter a 4-digit password in [ Password: ].

Set this to identify the user associated with the job.

E

After making the necessary settings you want, click [ Print ].

The Locked Print job is sent to the printer.

F

Enter the password using the control panel, and then specify whether to print or delete the job.

For details about entering the password, see

p.113 “Entering a Password”

.

For details about deleting the job, see

p.114 “Deleting a Locked Print File”

.

Duplex Printing

Use this function to select duplex printing.

To use this function, the optional duplex unit must be installed on the printer.

You cannot perform duplex printing when using the bypass tray.

None

Disables duplex printing.

Flip on Long Edge

Prints so you can open it to the long edge when bound along the long edge.

Flip on Short Edge

Prints so you can open it to the short edge when bound along the short edge.

302

Mac OS Configuration

Availability of these items varies depending on the operating system you are using. Click the button that means [ Flip on Long Edge ] or [ Flip on Short Edge ] .

Color Mode

Use this function to select whether the document is printed in color or black and white.

Color

Prints color documents in full color.

Color images are printed using CMYK toner, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and

Black. CMYK represents the three primary subtractive colors.

If you want to adjust the print color, use the settings in the Advanced dialog box accessed from the Advanced button on the [ Print Quality ] tab.

Black and White

Prints everything, including color documents, in black and white. Black and

White printing is faster than Color. To stop black and white areas being printed with CMYK toner, select [ Black and White ] in the printer driver as well as in the application.

Gradation

Use this function to select a type of gradation suited to your requirements.

Fast

Prints quickly but loses smoothness.

Standard

Prints with good gradation.

Color Profile

Use this function to select the color profile pattern.

Auto

Use this setting to automatically configure the best color profile pattern based on the appearance of the document to be printed.

Photographic

Use this setting to enhance reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones.

303

Mac OS Configuration

Presentation

Use this setting to enhance reproduction of documents containing text and graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and so on. If you use this CRD for printing photographs, color and gradation might not reproduce so well.

Solid Color

Use this setting to print specific single colors, logos and so on.

User Setting

Use this setting to print images using a CRD downloaded from your application.

CLP Simulation

Prints the output colors similar to the colors displayed on the computer screen.

Use this function to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [ Fine ] or [ Super Fine ] is selected for “ Color Setting ”. The following items are available: [ Auto ] , [ Photographic ] , [ Presentation ] , and [ Solid Color ] .

Color Setting

Use this function to select the correction method used for color conversion.

The color rendering dictionary selected in the Color Profile setting is used.

Off

No modification to the color setting.

Fine

Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in color rendering dictionaries, and to perform CMYK conversion. This setting performs printing at an output target of Monitor

γ

= 1.8.

Super Fine

Select this setting to use a color rendering dictionary similar to the Fine setting but is capable of producing output that is more vivid. Use this setting to emphasize lighter colors. This setting performs printing at an output target of

Monitor

γ

= 2.2.

304

Mac OS Configuration

Use this function to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [ Fine ] or [ Super Fine ] is selected for “Color Setting”. The following items are available:

[ Auto ] , [ Photographic ] , [ Presentation ] , and [ Solid Color ] .

CMYK Simulation Profile

You can simulate the color tone of the printing ink.

You can select the printing ink standard from US OffsetPrint, Euroscale, Japan-

Color and PaletteColor.

Dithering

Use this function to set the Image Rendering mode.

Photographic

Performs dithering in an appropriate form for photographs.

Text

Performs dithering in an appropriate form for text.

Gray Reproduction

Use this function to select Black Color mode for text and line art.

Black by K

Select this setting to use a black toner.

Black/Gray by K

Black portions are printed in gray.

CMY+K

Select this setting to use all toners.

Color Matching

Use this function to select whether or not you want the colors in the documents to be adjusted before printing, so that the printed page matches the colors on the screen closer.

Image Color Control

Open the [ Image Color Matching ] dialog box, and then click this button to specify exactly how you want the colors on your screen adjusted before printing.

305

Mac OS Configuration

Printer Utility for Mac

By using Printer Utility for Mac, you can download fonts, change the name of the printer and so on.

If a Macintosh and printer are connected by USB, you cannot use Printer Utility for Mac.

Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and

Utilities”.

Printer Utility for Mac requires Mac OS 7.6.1-9.x, or Mac OS X 10.1.x or

10.2.1. Mac OS X 10.0.x and 10.2 are not supported.

Installing Printer Utility for Mac

Follow these steps to install Printer Utility for Mac on the machine.

A

Start the Macintosh.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM icon appears.

C

Double-click the hard disk icon to open it.

D

Double-click the CD-ROM icon.

The contents of the CD-ROM appear.

E

Double-click the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder.

Under Mac OS X, double-click the [ Mac OS X ] folder.

F

Double-click the [ PS Utility ] folder on the CD-ROM.

G

Double-click the [ Printer Utility for Mac ] folder.

H

Double-click the folder of the language you use.

I

Move the “Printer Utility for Mac” file to the Macintosh hard disk using a drag-and-drop operation.

J

Drag the CD-ROM icon to the Trash to eject the CD-ROM.

Printer Utility for Mac is installed.

306

Mac OS Configuration

Starting Printer Utility for Mac

Mac OS

Before starting Printer Utility for Mac, make sure the printer is selected in

[ Chooser ] on the Apple menu.

A

Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.

The [ Printer Utility for Mac ] dialog box appears.

B

Click [ OK ].

Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.

Mac OS X

A

Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.

The [ Printer Utility for Mac ] dialog box appears.

B

Click [ OK ].

C

In the [ Available Printers: ] box, select the printer you want to use.

If you change zones, select a name from [ Available Network Zones: ] .

❒ Click [ Choose Printer...

] on the Printer Utility for Mac menu if you want to change the printer.

D

Select the printer you want to use.

Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.

E

Click [ Choose ].

Printer Utility for Mac Functions

Downloading PS Fonts

You can download the PS fonts to the printer memory or hard disk drive.

The following procedure to download the fonts assume that you are a system administrator. If you are not, be sure to consult your system administrator.

During the download, do not turn off the power switch, operate the panel or open or close the cover.

If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to the defaults.

307

Mac OS Configuration

Confirm that a Macintosh and the printer are connected with Appletalk.

A

Select [ Download PS Fonts...

] on the [ File ] menu.

B

Click [ Add to list ].

The dialog box to select fonts appears.

C

Select the desired font files, and then click [ Open ].

The list of selectable font names appears.

D

After adding all the fonts you want to download, click [ OK ].

The dialog box of selected fonts to download appears.

E

Click [ Download ].

The fonts begin to download, and the download status is shown.

F

When the completion message appears, click [ OK ].

G

Click [ Cancel ].

Some fonts cannot be downloaded.

Before downloading, read the documentation about the fonts you want to use.

Displaying Printer Fonts

You can display the available fonts currently downloaded to the printer. Fonts in the printer memory and hard disk drive can be displayed.

A

Select [ Display Printer's Fonts...

] on the [ File ] menu.

A dialog box appears.

B

Select [ Printer's memory ] or [ Printer's disk ].

C

Click [ OK ].

The fonts displayed in italics are the default fonts.

Deleting Fonts

You can delete fonts from the printer memory or hard disk drive.

You cannot delete the fonts displayed in italic.

A

Select [ Display Printer's fonts ] on the [ File ] menu.

A dialog box appears.

308

Mac OS Configuration

B

Select [ Printer's memory ] or [ Printer's disk ].

C

Select the fonts you want to delete.

D

Click [ Delete ].

A confirmation message appears.

E

Confirm the fonts you want to delete and the printer name from which you want to delete the fonts.

F

Click [ Continue ], and then click [ OK ].

G

Click [ OK ].

Initializing the Printer Disk

When initializing the printer hard disk, all the fonts downloaded to the printer hard disk drive are deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the fonts on the hard disk drive.

When initializing the printer hard disk drive from the control panel, all of the data on the printer hard disk drive is deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the data on the hard disk drive.

Do not turn off the power switch until initializing is completed, otherwise the hard disk drive might be damaged.

A

Select [ Initialize Printer's Disk...

] on the [ File ] menu.

The confirmation message appears. To cancel initialization, click [ Cancel ] .

B

Click [ Execute ].

Initializing starts.

C

When the completion message appears, click [ OK ].

Page Setup

You can set the paper size on which to print “Print Fonts Catalogue” and “Prints

Fonts Sample”.

A

Select [ Page Setup...

] on the [ File ] menu.

B

Select the paper size.

Printing Font Catalog

You can print the names of fonts available on the printer.

A

Select [ Print Fonts Catalogue ] on the [ File ] menu.

309

Mac OS Configuration

B

Click [ Print ].

The paper selected under [ Page Setup ] is used.

Printing Font Sample

You can print samples of fonts downloaded to the hard disk drive or memory.

A

Select [ Print Fonts Sample...

] on the [ File ] menu.

B

Click [ Print ].

Print by using the paper selected on [ Page Setup ] .

Renaming the Printer

You can change the printer name displayed under Appletalk. If you connect several printers on the network, assign different names so you can identify them. If several printers have the same name, a digit appears next to the printer name in

[ Chooser ] .

You can enter up to 31 digits and letters.

Do not use symbols, for example “*”, “:”, “=”, “@”, “~”.

Mac OS

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Rename Printer...

].

B

In the [ New Name: ] filed enter a new name.

C

Click [ Rename ].

The printer name is changed.

D

Click [ OK ].

E

On the Apple menu, click [ Chooser ].

F

Click the [ AdobePS ] icon.

G

Select the printer whose name you changed, and then close the [ Chooser ] dialog box.

If there are several Appletalk zones, select the zone the machine belongs to.

310

Mac OS Configuration

Mac OS X

A

On the [ File ] menu, click [ Rename Printer...

].

B

In the [ New Name: ] filed enter a new name.

C

Click [ Rename ].

The printer name is changed.

D

Click [ OK ].

E

On the [ Printer Utility for Mac ] menu, click [ Choose Printer...

].

F

In the [ Available Network Zones: ] list, select the zone for the Macintosh in use.

G

In the [ Available Printers: ] list, select the printer whose name you changed, and then click [ Choose ].

Restarting the Printer

You can restart the printer.

A

Select [ Restart Printer ] on the [ File ] menu.

B

Confirm the message that appears on the screen, and then click [ Restart ].

The printer restarts.

The fonts downloaded in the printer memory will be deleted.

If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to the defaults.

Downloading PostScript Files

You can download a Postscript file to the printer.

A

Select [ Download PostScript File...

] on the [ Utility ] menu.

B

Select the file name to download, click the file name, and then click

[ Open ].

C

Type the log file name, and then click [ Save ].

The selected file is downloaded.

Errors are recorded in the log file.

Selecting the Zone

You can change the zone to which the printer belongs under Appletalk.

311

Mac OS Configuration

Confirm that a Macintosh and printer are connected with Appletalk.

Mac OS

A

On the [ Utility ] menu, click [ Select Zone...

].

The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.

B

Select the zone in which you want to locate the printer, and then click

[ Change ].

A confirmation message appears.

C

Click [ Continue ].

A confirmation message appears.

D

Click [ OK ].

E

On the Apple menu, click [ Chooser ].

F

Click the [ AdobePS ] icon.

G

In the [ Appletalk zone: ] list, select the zone you changed.

H

In the [ Select a PostScript Printer: ] list, select the printer you want to use.

I

Close the [ Chooser ] dialog box.

Mac OS X

A

On the [ Utility ] menu, click [ Select Zone...

].

The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.

B

Select the zone which you want to locate the printer in, and then click

[ Change ].

A confirmation message appears.

C

Click [ Continue ].

A confirmation message appears.

D

Click [ OK ].

E

On the [ Printer Utility for Mac ] menu, click [ Choose Printer...

].

F

In the [ Available Network Zones: ] list, select the zone you changed.

G

In the [ Available Printers: ] list, select the model of printer in use, and then click [ Choose ].

312

Mac OS Configuration

Displaying the Printer Status

You can display and confirm the current status of the printer.

A

Select [ Display Printer Status...

] on the [ Utility ] menu.

The current status of the printer appears.

B

Confirm the current status of the printer.

You can confirm the memory capacity, the VM (Virtual Memory) space, the hard disk drive status and available space on the hard disk drive. You can also confirm the zone to which the printer belongs.

C

Click [ OK ].

Launching the Dialogue Console

You can create and edit a PostScript file for printing, and then download it to the printer.

“Launch Dialogue Console” is recommended for users with an understanding of PostScript.

Do not download any file other than PostScript files to the printer.

“Launch Dialogue Console” must be used at your own responsibility.

A

Select [ Launch Dialogue Console...

] on the [ Utility ] menu.

Open the editing screen. The Dialogue Console menu bar appears.

B

Type the PostScript command in the editor screen.

To edit a PostScript file, select [ Open ] on the [ File ] menu to open it.

You can search or replace a character string by using the [ Search ] menu.

C

After editing the PostScript file, select [ Download Top Window ] on [ Console ] menu to start printing.

The PostScript file is sent to the printer.

The [ Reply from Printer ] box opens, depending on the PostScript file you sent.

D

Select [ Return To Main Menu ] on the [ Console ] menu to close the PostScript file.

313

Appendix

Software and Utilities Included on the CD-

ROM

The following softwares and utilities are included in the CD-ROMs that come with the printer.

Font Manager 2000

For installing new screen fonts, or organizing and managing fonts already in the system. For details about Font Manager 2000, see the manual on the CD-

ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

For the system administrator to manage network printers.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

For users to manage their network print status.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help

1394 Utility

For the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit. For details, see the Readme file or the manual provided with the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit.

USB Printing Support

For connection to Windows 98 SE/Me computers via USB.

Viewing the contents of the CD-ROM

Follow the procedure below to view the contents of the CD-ROM.

A

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

B

Click [ Browse This CD-ROM ].

Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD-ROM.

Printer Drivers for This Printer

Printing requires installing a printer driver appropriate to your operating system.

The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM provided with this printer.

G1307502_1.00

Copyright © 2005

314

Appendix

PCL 6/5e printer driver

This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer via a printer language.

The following operating system is supported.

• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0

For Windows NT 4.0, Service Pack 6 or higher is required.

You can only print in black and white with PCL 5c driver.

RPCS printer driver

This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. In addition to the conventional user interface, another preset user interface is provided.

The following operating system is supported.

• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0

For Windows NT 4.0, Service Pack 6 or higher is required.

PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD files

PostScript printer drivers and the PPD files are included on the CD-ROM provided with this printer. PostScript printer drivers allow the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.

The following operating system is supported.

• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows

NT 4.0, Mac OS, and Mac OS X

The PostScript printer drivers and PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.

For Mac OS, version 8.6 or higher is required. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)

PPD files

PPD files are included on the CD-ROM provided with this printer. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is an application that uses TCP/IP and IPX/SPX to monitor network printers. It can monitor multiple network printers using IP address. We recommend that network administrators use this application.

315

Appendix

File path

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is stored in the following folder on the CD-

ROM.

NETWORK\DEVMON\admin\DISK1

Operating system

Windows 95/98/Me

Windows 2000

Windows XP

Windows Server 2003

Windows NT 4.0

Protocol stack

TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me

NetWare Client provided with Windows 95/98

Novell Client provided with Windows 95/98

TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000

NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000

Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Window NT

TCP/IP provided with Windows XP

IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP

NetWare Client provided with Windows XP

Novell Client provided with Windows XP

TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003

IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003

NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003

Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003

TCP/IP provided with Windows NT

IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT

Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows

NT

Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT

Available functions

SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin has the following functions to check:

• printer supplies such as paper or toner;

• results of print jobs executed from the computer.

For details about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see SmartDevice-

Monitor for Admin Help.

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client has the following functions. We recommend that users install this application.

316

Appendix

• Printing in a peer-to-peer network, using TCP/IP, and IPP from Windows

95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.

• Constantly monitoring the status of devices on the network using TCP/IP and

IPX/SPX.

File path

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is stored in the following folder on the CD-

ROM.

NETWORK\DEVMON\CLIENT\DISK1

Operating system

Windows 95/98/Me

Windows 2000

Windows XP

Windows Server 2003

Windows NT 4.0

Protocol stack

TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me

NetWare Client provided with Windows 95/98/Me

Novell Client provided with Windows 95/98/Me

TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000

IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000

NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000

Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or NT

TCP/IP provided with Windows XP

IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP

NetWare Client provided with Windows XP

Novell Client provided with Windows XP

TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003

IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003

NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003

Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003

TCP/IP provided with Windows NT

IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT

Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows

NT

Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT

Available functions

SmartDeviceMonitor for Client has the following functions.

• Peer-to-peer print function

• Prints directly on the network printer without sending any data to a print server.

• Prints on a substitute printer when there are too many jobs waiting on the specified printer, or when an error disables printing (Recovery Printing).

• Allocates multiple print jobs to multiple printers (Parallel Printing).

317

Appendix

• Executes prior group registration of printers specified for Recovery

Printing or Parallel Printing.

• Notification function

• Displays an error message when there is an error on the specified printer while transferring or printing data.

• Notifies a print completion. You can also be notified of the print condition, such as displaying the notice only when Recovery Printing is executed.

• Monitoring function

• Checks printer supplies such as paper or toner.

• Simultaneously monitors multiple printers in use.

• Checks the printer's network settings and detailed information of printers.

• Enables you to check the print job log using the user ID

For Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing, the options on the printers must be the same. If a necessary option is not installed, a printer cannot be used for Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing.

For Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing, the paper loaded in the printers must be the same. When a tray is selected for printing, load the same paper in that tray in all printers.

For Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing, the print results may be different if the printers are not the same model or have exactly the same options.

If you select Sample Print or Locked Print, you cannot select Recovery

Printing or Parallel Printing.

For details about SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, See SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.

318

Appendix

Cautions to Take When Using in a network

Connecting a Dial-up Router to a Network

When the NetWare file server and printer are on opposite sides of a router, packets are sent back and forth, causing communication charges to be incurred. Because packet transmission is a specification of NetWare, you need to change the configuration of the router. If the network you are using does not allow you to configure the router, configure the printer instead.

Configuring the router

Filter packets so that they do not pass over the dial-up router.

The MAC address of the printer doing the filtering is printed on the printer configuration page. For details about printing a configuration page, see

p.161

“Printing a Configuration Page” .

For details about configuring the printer if the router cannot be configured, see the instructions below.

A

Display Web Image Monitor.

B

On the Web Image Monitor top page, click [ Login ].

C

Enter the user name and passwords, and then click [ OK ].

For details about the password, consult your network administrator.

D

Click [ Configuration ] in the left area, click [ Network ], and then click [ NetWare ].

E

In the right area, select the [ Frame Type ] you are using.

F

Click [ Apply ].

G

Close the Web browser.

Using DHCP

This printer can be used in a DHCP environment. In a WINS server environment, the printer name can simultaneously be registered with a WINS server.

Note the following points when an Ethernet interface and an IEEE 1394 (IP over

1394) interface are simultaneously installed.

319

Appendix

When static IP addresses are set for each interface

• IP address: When set at the same value, the Ethernet interface is preferred.

• Subnet mask: When a value overlaps, the Ethernet interface is preferred.

• Gateway address: The value set is used. For the gateway address, set the gateway address located in the subnetwork set by the interface. If the value is outside the subnet range set by the interface, it operates as “0.0.0.0”.

When each setting is acquired from the DHCP server

• IP address, subnet mask: Set for each value leased by the DHCP server operating on a connected interface. When overlapping IP addresses or identical IP addresses in the subnetwork are set, only the highest priority active value is set for the interface.

The default priority interface is Ethernet.

• AutoNet: An automatic private address (169.254. xxx.xxx) is set for high priority interfaces.

The default priority interface is IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).

• Gateway address, DNS server address, domain name: Settings are made for DHCP-acquired values that have the highest interface priority.

If the gateway address is outside the subnetwork range set by the interface, it operates as “0.0.0.0”.

The default priority interface is Ethernet.

When the settings of the static IP addresses and the DHCP acquired value overlap

• IP address, subnet mask: When the static IP address and DHCP-acquired value (IP address) are the same, or the static subnet mask value and

DHCP-acquired subnet mask value overlap, the interface set by the static

IP address is available using its value set. The interface set by DHCP is reset to the default.

• Gateway address: Use the manually set value.

• If a gateway address is set outside the interface subnetwork range, it operates as “0.0.0.0”.

When the static IP address is not set, or is set as “0.0.0.0”, the interface setting the DHCP-acquired value is activated.

Supported DHCP server operating systems are: Windows 2000 Server, Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or higher, NetWare, and UNIX standard.

320

Appendix

The IP address acquired from DHCP can be checked on the configuration page. For information about printing a configuration page, see

p.161 “Printing a Configuration Page” .

When using WINS server, set the WINS server as shown on

p.321 “Configuring the WINS Server”

.

Under the WINS server, host names can be used for remote network printer ports.

If you are not using the WINS server, reserve the printer's IP address in the

DHCP server so the same IP address is assigned every time.

When there are multiple DHCP servers, make the same reservation for all.

This printer uses information from the DHCP server that responds first.

The DHCP relay-agent is not supported. If you are using the DHCP relayagent on an ISDN line network, expensive line charges will be incurred. This is because your computer connects to the ISDN line whenever a packet is transferred from the printer.

Using AutoNet

If the printer IP address is not assigned by a DHCP server automatically, a temporary IP address starting with 169.254, which is not used on the network, can be automatically selected by the printer.

You must change this setting to “on” to use AutoNet.

See

p.219 “autonet”

.

The DHCP-assigned IP address has priority over that selected by AutoNet.

The printer reboots at this time, and is temporarily unable to print.

You can check the current IP address on the configuration page. For details about printing a configuration page, see

p.161 “Printing a Configuration

Page” .

When AutoNet is running, the printer name is not registered on the WINS server.

No communication can take place except between units started up using AutoNet. However, communication can take place with Macintosh computers running Mac OS X 10.2.3 or higher versions.

Configuring the WINS Server

The printer can be configured to register its NetBIOS name with a WINS server when the power is turned on. This enables the NetBIOS name of the printer to be specified from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin even in a DHCP environment.

This section explains configuring the WINS server.

321

Appendix

The WINS server is supported with Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or higher, and Windows 2000 Servers WINS Manager.

For details about the WINS server settings, see Windows Help.

If there is no reply from the WINS server, the NetBIOS name is registered by broadcast.

The NetBIOS name can be entered using up to 13 alphanumeric characters.

Using Web Image Monitor

A

Start a Web browser.

B

Enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the address bar to access the printer whose settings you want to change.

Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.

C

Click [ Login ].

The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.

D

Enter the user name and password, and then click [ OK ].

For details about the password, consult your network administrator.

E

In the left area, click [ Configuration ], and then click [ Network ].

F

Click [ TCP/IP ].

G

Check that [ Enable ] is selected for [ WINS ] in the [ Ethernet+IEEE 802.11b

] column, and then enter the WINS server IP address in [ Primary WINS Server ] and [ Secondary WINS Server ].

When installing the optional expansion 1394 board and using IP over 1394 simultaneously, perform the same operations in the [ IP over 1394 ] column.

H

Click [ Apply ].

I

Quit Web Image Monitor.

Using telnet

See p.217 “Using telnet” .

322

Appendix

Using the Dynamic DNS Function

Dynamic DNS is a function which dynamically updates (registers and deletes) records (A record and PTR record) managed by the DNS server. When a DNS server is part of the network environment to which this printer, a DNS client, is connected, records can be dynamically updated using this function.

Updating

Updating procedure varies depending on whether the printer IP address is static or acquired by DHCP.

When the dynamic DNS function is not used, records managed by the DNS server must be updated manually, if the printer's IP address is changed.

To update the record using the printer, the DNS server has to have one of the following:

• No security settings made.

• If security settings are made, an IP-specified client (this printer) permits updating.

For a static IP setting

If the IP address or host name is changed, the A and PTR records are updated.

If the A record is registered, CNAME is also registered. CNAMEs that can be registered are as follows:

• Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b

RNPXXXXXX (XXXXXX represents the last 3 hexadecimal bytes of the

MAC address)

• IEEE 1394

RNPXXXXXXXXXX (XXXXXXXXXX represents the lower 3-7 bytes of the

MAC Address in hexadecimal)

For DHCP settings

As a substitute for the printer, the DHCP server updates the record, and one of the following occurs:

• When the printer acquires the IP address from the DHCP server, the DHCP server updates the A and PTR records.

• When the printer acquires the IP address from the DHCP server, the printer updates the A record, and the DHCP server updates the PTR record.

If the A record is registered, CNAME is also registered. CNAMEs that can be registered are as follows:

• Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b

RNPXXXXXX (XXXXXX represents the last 3 hexadecimal bytes of the

MAC address)

323

Appendix

• IEEE 1394

RNPXXXXXXXXXX (XXXXXXXXXX represents the lower 3-7 bytes of the

MAC Address in hexadecimal)

Dynamic update using message authentication (TSIG, SIG(0)) is not supported.

DNS servers targeted for operation

For static IP setting

• Microsoft DNS servers with standard Windows 2000 Server/Windows

Server 2003 features

• BIND 8.2.3 or higher

For DHCP setup, when the printer updates the A record

• Microsoft DNS servers with standard Windows 2000 Server/Windows

Server 2003 features

• BIND 8.2.3 or higher

For DHCP setup, when the DHCP server updates records

• Microsoft DNS servers with standard Windows 2000 Server/Windows

Server 2003 features

• BIND 8.2.3 or higher

• DNS servers with standard NetWare 5 (or a higher version) features

DHCP servers targeted for operation

As a substitute for the printer, DHCP servers capable of updating the A record and PTR record are as follows:

• Microsoft DHCP servers with standard Windows 2000 Server (Service Pack

3 or higher versions)/Windows Server 2003 features

• ISC DHCP 3.0 or higher

• DHCP server with standard NetWare 5 features

Setting the dynamic DNS function

Make settings with telnet using the “dns” command. For details, see p.222 “dns”

.

324

Appendix

Configuring SSL Encryption

This section describes how to configure SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption.

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption

To protect the communication path and establish encrypted communication, create and install the server certificate.

There are two ways of installing a server certificate: create and install a self-certificate using the machine, or request a certificate from a certificate authority and install it.

Configuration flow (self-signed certificate)

A Creating and installing the server certificate

Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

B Enabling SSL

Enable the [ SSL/TLS ] setting using Web Image Monitor.

Configuration flow (certificate issued by a certificate authority)

A Creating the server certificate

Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

The application procedure after creating the certificate depends on the certificate authority. Follow the procedure specified by the certificate authority.

B Installing the server certificate

Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

C Enabling SSL

Enable the [ SSL/TLS ] setting using Web Image Monitor.

325

Appendix

To confirm whether SSL configuration is enabled, enter https://(machine’saddress) in your Web browser’s address bar to access this machine. If the

“The page cannot be displayed” message appears, check the configuration as the SSL configuration is invalid.

Creating and Installing the Self-Signed Certificate

Create and install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

This section explains the use of a self-certificate as the server certificate.

A

Open a Web browser.

B

Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.

C

Select Administrator mode.

For details about selecting Administrator mode in Web Image Monitor, see

p.197 “Access in the Administrator Mode” .

D

Click [ Configuration ], then click [ Security ], and then click [ Certificates ].

E

Click [ Create ].

F

Make the necessary settings.

• Common Name: Enter the server certificate common name, using up to 64 characters (required). The common name cannot include any spaces, and is case sensitive. The default is the IP address of the interface board in use.

• Organization: Enter the full name of your company, using up to 64 characters (optional). The organization name cannot include any spaces, and is case sensitive.

• Organizational Unit: Enter the section of your company that is requesting the certificate, using up to 64 characters (optional). The organization unit name cannot include any spaces, and is case sensitive.

• City/Locality: Enter the city/locality in which the device is located, using up to 128 characters (optional). The city/locality name cannot include any spaces, and is case sensitive.

• State/Province: Enter the state/province in which the device is located, using up to 128 characters (optional). The state/province name cannot include any spaces, and is case sensitive.

• Country Code: Enter the country in which the device is located, using twoletter ISO 3166 abbreviation of the country (required).

• Validity Period: Enter the period of time for which the server certificate is valid, in years. The default is one year.

326

Appendix

• Validity Start Date: Enter the start date of the validity of the server certificate. The default is the current date obtained from the internal clock of the computer that is accessing Web Image Monitor.

G

Click [ OK ].

[ Installed ] appears under [ Certificate Status ] to show that a server certificate for the printer has been installed.

Click [ Delete ] to delete the server certificate from the printer.

Creating the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)

Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as the server certificate.

A

Open a Web browser.

B

Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.

C

Select Administrator mode.

For details about selecting Administrator mode in Web Image Monitor, see

p.197 “Access in the Administrator Mode” .

D

Click [ Configuration ], then click [ Security ], and then click [ Certificates ].

The [ Certificate Information ] page appears.

E

Click [ Request ].

F

Make the necessary settings.

• Common Name: Enter the server certificate common name, using up to 64 characters (required). The common name cannot include any spaces, and is case sensitive. The default is the IP address of the interface board in use.

• Organization: Enter the full name of your company, using up to 64 characters (optional). The organization name cannot include any spaces, and is case sensitive.

• Organizational Unit: Enter the section of your company that is requesting the certificate, using up to 64 characters (optional). The organization unit name cannot include any spaces, and is case sensitive.

• City/Locality: Enter the city/locality in which the device is located, using up to 128 characters (optional). The city/locality name cannot include any spaces, and is case sensitive.

327

Appendix

• State/Province: Enter the state/province in which the device is located, using up to 128 characters (optional). The state/province name cannot include any spaces, and is case sensitive.

• Country Code: Enter the country in which the device is located, using twoletter ISO 3166 abbreviation of the country (required).

• Validity Period: Enter the period of time for which the server certificate is valid, in years. The default is one year.

• Validity Start Date: Enter the start date of the validity of the server certificate. The default is the current date obtained from the internal clock of the computer that is accessing Web Image Monitor.

G

Click [ OK ].

[ Requesting ] appears under [ Certificate Status ] .

Use the data in the [ Certificate Request Contents: ] dialog box to apply to the certificate authority.

H

Apply to the certificate authority for the server certificate.

The application procedure depends on the certificate authority. For details, contact the certificate authority.

When applying, use the data created with Web Image Monitor.

By using Web Image Monitor, you can create the contents of the server certificate but you cannot send the application.

Click [ Cancel Request ] to cancel the request for the server certificate.

Installing the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)

Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.

This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as the server certificate.

Enter the server certificate contents issued by the certificate authority.

A

Open a Web browser.

B

Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.

C

Select Administrator mode.

For details about selecting Administrator mode in Web Image Monitor, see

p.197 “Access in the Administrator Mode” .

D

Click [ Configuration ], then click [ Security ], and then click [ Certificates ].

The [ SSL Certificate ] page appears.

328

Appendix

E

Click [ Install ].

F

Enter the contents of the server certificate.

In the displayed field, enter the contents of the server certificate issued by the certificate authority.

For details about the displayed items and selectable items, see Web Image

Monitor Help.

G

Click [ OK ].

[ Installed ] appears under [ Certificate Status ] to show that a server certificate for the printer has been installed.

Enabling SSL

After installing the server certificate in the printer, enable the SSL setting.

This procedure is used for a self-signed certificate or a certificate issued by a certificate authority.

A

Open a Web browser.

B

Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.

C

Select Administrator mode.

For details about selecting Administrator mode in Web Image Monitor, see

p.197 “Access in the Administrator Mode” .

D

Click [ Configuration ], then click [ Security ], and then click [ SSL/TLS ].

The [ SSL/TLS Settings ] page appears.

E

Click [ Enable ] for [ SSL/TLS ].

F

Click [ Apply ].

The SSL setting is enabled.

When using SSL, enter "http://(machine's-address)/" to access the printer.

For this to work, Internet Explorer 5.5 or later, or Netscape 7.0 or later must be installed on your computer.

User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)

If you have installed a server certificate and enabled SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), you need to install the certificate on the user’s computer.

329

Appendix

The administrator must explain the procedure for installing the certificate to users.

If a warning dialog box appears while accessing the machine using the Web browser or IPP, start the Certificate Import Wizard and install a certificate.

A

When the [ Security Alert ] dialog box appears, click [ View Certificate ].

The [ Certificate ] dialog box appears.

To be able to respond to inquiries from users about such problems as expiry of the certificate, check the contents of the certificate.

B

On the [ General ] tab, click [ Install Certificate...

].

Certificate Import Wizard starts.

C

Install the certificate by following the Certificate Import Wizard instructions.

For details about how to install the certificate, see the Web browser Help.

If a certificate issued by a certificate authority is installed in the printer, confirm the certificate store location with the certificate authority.

Installing the Certificate Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client

If the [Security Alert] dialog box appears when accessing the printer using IPP to create or configure an IPP port, or when printing, install the certificate.

To select the certificate store location when using Certificate Import Wizard, click [ Place all certificates in the following store ] , and then click [ Local Computer ] under [ Trusted Root Certification Authorities ] .

Internet Explorer must be installed on your computer. Use the latest version.

Internet Explorer 6.0 or later is recommended.

A

When [ Security Alert ] appears, click [ View Certificate ].

The [Certificate] dialog box appears.

B

On the [ General ] tab, click [ Install Certificate...

].

Certificate Import Wizard starts.

C

Click [ Place all certificates in the following store ], and then click [ Browse...

].

The [ Select certificate store ] dialog box appears.

D

Click [ Next ].

E

Select the [ Show physical stores ] check box, and then click [ Local Computer ] under [ Trusted Root Certification Authorities ].

330

Appendix

F

Click [OK].

The certificate store location appears under [ Certificate store: ] .

G

Click [ Next ].

H

Click [ Finish ].

I

Click [ OK ].

The certificate is installed.

When you create or change an IPP port using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, enter "http://(machine's-address)/ printer" in [ Printer URL ] to access the printer.

331

Appendix

Installing Font Manager 2000

Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, installing applications by Auto Run requires administrator permission. To install a printer driver by Auto Run, log on using an account that has administrator permission.

A

Quit all applications currently running.

B

Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

The installer starts.

C

Click [ Font Manager 2000 ].

D

Follow the instructions on the screen.

332

Appendix

Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0

Under Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0

with Adobe PageMaker, you need to copy PPD files to the PageMaker folder.

PPD files have the .ppd extension in the folder “DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME \(Language)\DISK1\” on the CD-ROM.

The “WIN9X_ME” folder inside the “PS” folder is for Windows 95/98/Me. Use the folder at this level that is appropriate for the operating system you are currently using.

The third folder “(Language)” may be substituted by an appropriate language name.

Copy the “.ppd” file to the PageMaker folder.

• For PageMaker 6.0 default installation

The directory is “C:\PM6\RSRC\PPD4”.

• For PageMaker 6.5 default installation

The directory is “C:\PM65\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.

The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.

• For PageMaker 7.0 default installation

The directory is “C:\PM7\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.

The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.

If the driver is not set correctly after copying the “.ppd” file, printing may not be performed properly.

When using PageMaker, the optional features that can be selected by the printer driver will not be active. The following procedure describes how to activate the optional printer features.

A On the [ File ] menu, click [ Print ] .

The [ Print Document ] dialog box appears.

B Make the necessary settings in the [ Features ] box.

333

Appendix

When Using Windows Terminal

Service/MetaFrame

The following explains how to use Windows Terminal Service and Maintenance.

Operating Environment

The following operating systems and MetaFrame versions are supported.

Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition with SP6 or higher

• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3/FR1 SP3/SP4

• MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/SP2/FR1

Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server

• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3/FR1 SP3/SP4

• MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/SP2/SP3/FR1/FR2/FR3

• MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0

Windows 2003 Server

• MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR3

• MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0

Supported Printer Drivers

When Windows Terminal Service is operating

• PCL printer drivers

• PostScript 3

The RPCS printer driver is not supported.

Some RPCS printer driver functions do not work if Windows Terminal Service is installed.

Limitations

The following limitations apply to the Windows Terminal Service environment.

These limitations are built in Windows Terminal Service or MetaFrame.

334

Appendix

Windows Terminal Service

In an environment where Windows Terminal Service is installed, some printer driver functions are unavailable, even if no Windows Terminal Service functions are used. Use the install mode to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client in an environment where Terminal Service is running on a Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition or Windows 2000 Server family computer. The following are the two methods of installation using the install mode:

A Use [ Add/Remove Programs ] in [ Control Panel ] to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.

B Enter the following command in the MS-DOS command prompt:

CHANGE USER /INSTALL

To quit the install mode, enter the following command in the MS-DOS command prompt:

CHANGE USER /EXECUTE

For more information, see Windows Help.

MetaFrame's

[

Auto-creating client printers

]

Using [ Auto-creating client printers ] , you can select a logical printer created by copying the client's local printer data to the MetaFrame server. We strongly recommend testing this function in your network environment before using it for your work.

• The settings for optional equipment will not be stored in the server after the equipment is disconnected. The settings for optional equipment will be restored to its defaults each time the client computer logs on to the server.

• When printing a large number of bitmap images or using the server in a

WAN environment over dial-up lines such as ISDN, printing may not be possible or errors may occur, depending on data transfer rates.

• When using MetaFrame XP 1.0 or higher versions, we recommend making settings in [ Client Printer bandwidth ] under [ Citrix Management Console ] according to the environment.

• If a print error occurs on the server and the print job or a printer created in

[ Auto-creating client printers ] cannot be deleted, we recommend the following:

• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3, MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/FR1

Make settings in [ Delete unfinished print jobs ] in the registry. For details, see the Readme file provided with MetaFrame.

• MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR2

Make settings in [ Delete pending print jobs at logout ] under [ Printer Properties Management ] of Citrix Management Console.

335

Appendix

MetaFrame's

[

Printer driver replication

]

Using [ Printer driver replication ] , you can distribute printer drivers across all servers in a server farm. We strongly recommend testing this function in your network environment before using it for your work.

• If the printer drivers are not properly copied, install them directly onto each server.

336

Appendix

Cautions When Using Bluetooth Interface

Unit

The optional Bluetooth interface unit operation mode is set to [ Public ] as default.

If the setting is changed to [ Private ] , only registered computers can use this printer via the Bluetooth interface unit.

Check the operation mode settings using Web Image Monitor or telnet.

For details about using Web Image Monitor, see p.194 “Using Web Image

Monitor” . For details about setting items, see Web Image Monitor Help.

For details about making operation mode settings using telnet, see p.219 “btconfig”

.

337

Appendix

Information about Installed Applications

expat

Use of the software installed on this product, including the controller (hereinafter

“software”) and the expat Version 1.95.2 application software (hereinafter “expat

1.95.2”), is subject to the following conditions:

The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of the product including expat 1.95.2 and the product manufacturer allows the initial developer of expat 1.95.2 to be free from these obligations.

Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the

Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WAR-

RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-

POSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR

COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHER-

WISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFT-

WARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Information on expat 1.95.2 is available at: http://expat.sourceforge.net/

JPEG LIBRARY

• The software installed on this product is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

NetBSD

Copyright Notice of NetBSD

For all users to use this product:

338

Appendix

This product contains NetBSD operating system:

For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not in the public domain; its authors retain their copyright.

The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD source code. For exact copyright notice applicable for each of the files/binaries, the source code tree must be consulted.

A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/.

Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

C All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.

and its contributors.

D Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND

CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-

CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DIS-

CLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS

BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEM-

PLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF

USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AD-

VISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Authors Name List

All product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners.

The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software that we have mentioned in this document:

• This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

339

Appendix

• This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the Net-

BSD Project.

• This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.

and its contributors.

• This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.

• This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.

• This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.

• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou.

• This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.

• This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert.

• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles Hannum.

• This product includes software developed by Theo de Raadt.

• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R.

Thorpe for the NetBSD Project.

• This product includes software developed by the University of California,

Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.

• This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.

• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for the NetBSD Project.

• This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg.

• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.

• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone.

• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the NetBSD

Project.

• This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.

• This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the

NetBSD Project.

• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank van der Linden

• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R.

Thorpe.

• The software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley.

• This product includes software developed by Chris Provenzano, the University of California, Berkeley, and contributors.

Samba(Ver 2.2.2-1.1)

Copyright © Andrew Tridgell 1994-1998

340

Appendix

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software

Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FIT-

NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public

License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,

Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.

RSA BSAFE

®

• This product includes RSA BSAFE ® cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security Inc.

• RSA is a registered trademark and BSAFE is a registered trademark of RSA

Security Inc.in the United States and/or other countries.

• RSA Security Inc. All rights reserved.

341

advertisement

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents